ARCT1F475E

05
Safety Precautions
Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents.
To ensure that you use this product correctly, read this User’s Manual thoroughly before use.
Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety.
This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger.

WARNING
If critical situations that could lead to user’s death or serious injury is assumed by
mishandling of the product.
-Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system, so that the whole system
remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor.
-Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas. It could lead to an explosion.
-Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery
or other electronic parts.

CAUTION
If critical situations that could lead to user’s injury or only property damage is assumed
by mishandling of the product.
-To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation, use this product at the values less than
the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications.
-Do not dismantle or remodel the product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke
generation.
-Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity. It could lead to an electric shock.
-Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit.
-Connect the wires or connectors securely.
The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid, flammable materials, metals to go into the inside of the
product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Do not undertake construction (such as connection and disconnection) while the power supply is on.
It could lead to an electric shock.

Copyright / Trademarks
-This manual and its contents are copyrighted.
-You may not copy this manual,in whole or part,without written consent of Panasonic Electric
Works.,Ltd.
-Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
-All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
-Matsushita Electric Works,Ltd. pursues a policy of continuous improvement of the
Design and performance of its products, therefore,we reserve the right to change the manual/
product without notice.

BNTN
Table of Contents
Before You Start
Programming Tool Restrictions
When Using FP0 Programs
1. Functions and Restrictions of the Unit........................................ 1-1
1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit............................................................ 1-2
1.2 Unit Types.................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.1 FP0R Control Units ....................................................................................1-4
1.2.2 FP0 Expansion Units..................................................................................1-5
1.2.3 Intelligent Units...........................................................................................1-6
1.2.4 Link Units ...................................................................................................1-6
1.2.5 Power Supply Unit......................................................................................1-7
1.2.6 Options and Repair Parts...........................................................................1-7
1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combination .............................................................. 1-8
1.4 Programming Tools ................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.1 Required Tools for Programming...............................................................1-9
1.4.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable ................................................1-9

2. Specifications and Functions of Control Unit............................ 2-1

2.1 Part Names and Functions ........................................................................ 2-2
2.1.1 Part Names and Functions ........................................................................2-2
2.2 Input and Output Specifications................................................................. 2-4
2.2.1 Input Specifications ....................................................................................2-4
2.2.2 Output Specifications .................................................................................2-5
2.3 Terminal layout diagrams .......................................................................... 2-7
2.4 Backup Function and Clock/Calender Function of FP0R-T32 ................. 2-10
2.4.1 Backup Function ......................................................................................2-10
2.4.2 Clock/Calender.........................................................................................2-11
2.4.3 Built-in Backup Battery.............................................................................2-13

3. Expansion ....................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Expansion Method ..................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Part Names and Functions ........................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Input and Output Specifications................................................................. 3-4
3.4 Terminal layout diagram ............................................................................ 3-6

4. I/O Allocation................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 I/O Allocation ............................................................................................. 4-2
4.2 I/O Allocation for FP0R Control Unit .......................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 I/O Numbers of FP0R Control Unit ............................................................4-3
4.3 I/O Numbers of FP0 Expansion Unit.......................................................... 4-4

5. Installation and Wiring................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Installation.................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.1 Installation Environment and Space ..........................................................5-2
5.1.2 Installation and Removal............................................................................5-3
5.1.3 Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate ..........................................5-4
 5.2 Wiring of Power Supply ............................................................................. 5-6
5.2.1 Wiring of Power Supply..............................................................................5-6
5.2.2 Grounding...................................................................................................5-7
5.3 Wiring of Input and Output ........................................................................ 5-8
5.3.1 Input Wiring ................................................................................................5-8
5.3.2 Output Wiring ...........................................................................................5-10
5.3.3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings....................................5-10
5.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type................................................................. 5-11
5.5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type ................................................................ 5-13
5.6 Wiring of Molex Connector Type ............................................................. 5-15
5.7 Wiring of COM Port (RS232C Port)......................................................... 5-16
5.8 Safety Measures ..................................................................................... 5-18
5.8.1 Safety Measures ......................................................................................5-18
5.8.2 Momentary Power Failures ......................................................................5-18
5.8.3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections ....................................5-18

6. Preparation of USB Port............................................................... 6-1

6.1 USB Connection........................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 Installation of USB Driver ...........................................................................6-3
6.1.2 Confirming COM Ports ...............................................................................6-5
6.1.3 Communication with Programming Tool ....................................................6-7
6.1.4 Restrictions on USB Communication .........................................................6-8

7. Communication ............................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Functions and Types ................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.1 Communication Modes and Communication Ports....................................7-2
7.1.2 Computer Link ............................................................................................7-2
7.1.3 General-purpose Serial Communication....................................................7-2
7.1.4 PC(PLC) Link .............................................................................................7-3
7.1.5 MODBUS RTU ...........................................................................................7-3
7.2 Communicaton Port Type.......................................................................... 7-5
7.2.1 Tool Port.....................................................................................................7-5
7.2.2 USB Port ....................................................................................................7-5
7.2.3 COM Port (RS232C Port)...........................................................................7-5
7.3 Communication Specifications .................................................................. 7-6
7.4 Communication Function 1: Computer Link .............................................. 7-7
7.4.1 Overview ....................................................................................................7-7
7.4.2 MEWTOCOL Slave Function .....................................................................7-8
7.4.3 Setting Communication Parameters ........................................................7-12
7.4.4 1:1 Communication (MEWTOCOL Slave Function).................................7-13
7.4.5 1:N Communication (MEWTOCOL Slave Function) ................................7-15
7.4.6 MEWTOCOL Master ................................................................................7-16
7.4.7 Setting in Compatiblity Mode with FP0 (FP0 Compatibility Mode) ..........7-18
7.5 Communication Function 2: General-purpose Serial Communication .... 7-19
7.5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................7-19
7.5.2 Programming Example of General-purpose Serial Communication ........7-20
7.5.3 Sending Data............................................................................................7-22
7.5.4 Receiving Data .........................................................................................7-24
7.5.5 Flag Operation in Serial Communication .................................................7-26
7.5.6 Changing Communication Mode Using F159(MTRN) Instruction............7-29
 7.5.7 Setting Communication Parameters ........................................................7-30
7.5.8 Connection with 1:1 Communication (General-purpose Serial
Communication) ....................................................................................7-31
7.5.9 1:N Communication (General-purpose Serial Communication)）...........7-35
7.5.10 Settings in Compatibility Mode with FP0 (FP0 Compatibility Mode)......7-36
7.6 Communication Function 3: PC(PLC) link Function ................................ 7-38
7.6.1 Overview ..................................................................................................7-38
7.6.2 Setting of Unit Numbers ...........................................................................7-40
7.6.3 Setting Communication Parameters: PC(PLC) Link ................................7-41
7.6.4 Link Area Allocation .................................................................................7-42
7.6.5 Setting the Largest Unit Number for PC(PLC) Link .................................7-47
7.6.6 Monitoring ................................................................................................7-48
7.6.7 PC(PLC) Link Response Time.................................................................7-49
7.7 Communication Function 4: MODBUS RTU Communication.................. 7-53
7.7.1 Overview of Functions..............................................................................7-53
7.7.2 Setting Communication Parameters ........................................................7-56
7.7.3 MODBUS Master .....................................................................................7-57

8.High-speed counter, Pulse Output and PWM Output functions... 8-1

8.1 Overview of Each Functions ...................................................................... 8-2
8.1.1 Three Pulse Input/Output Functions ..........................................................8-2
8.1.2 Performance of Built-in High-speed Counter .............................................8-3
8.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items............................................ 8-4
8.2.1 Specifications .............................................................................................8-4
8.2.2 Functions Used and Restrictions ...............................................................8-8
8.3 High-speed Counter Function.................................................................. 8-11
8.3.1 Overview of High-speed Counter Function ..............................................8-11
8.3.2 Input Modes and Count............................................................................8-11
8.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width .....................................................................8-12
8.3.4 I/O Allocation............................................................................................8-13
8.3.5 Instructions used with High-speed Counter Function ..............................8-13
8.3.6 Sample program.......................................................................................8-16
8.4 Pulse Output Function ............................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function .........................................................8-19
8.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes.............................8-20
8.4.3 I/O Allocation............................................................................................8-22
8.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)...............................................8-23
8.4.5 Positioning Control Instruction F171 - Trapezoidal Control .....................8-26
8.4.6 JOG Positioning Type 0 (F171) Instruction..............................................8-29
8.4.7 JOG Positioning Type 1 (F171) Instruction..............................................8-31
8.4.8 JOG Operation (F172) Instruction............................................................8-33
8.4.9 Arbitrary Data Table Control (F174) Instruction.......................................8-35
8.4.10 Home Return (F177) Instruction ............................................................8-37
8.4.11 Linear Interpolation (F175) Instruction ...................................................8-39
8.5 PWM Output Function ............................................................................. 8-45
8.5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................8-45
8.5.2 PWM Output Instruction F173..................................................................8-45
9. Security Functions......................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Type of Security Functions........................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Password Protect Function ....................................................................... 9-4
9.2.1 Password Setting .......................................................................................9-5
9.3 Upload Protection...................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.1 Upload Protection Setting ..........................................................................9-9
9.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader ................................................. 9-10
9.4.1 Setting with FPWIN GR............................................................................9-11
9.5 Table of Security Settings/Cancel ........................................................... 9-12

10. Other Functions........................................................................... 10-1

10.1 P13 (ICWT) Instruction.......................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Sampling Trance Function .................................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................10-3
10.2.2 Details of Sampling Trace Function .......................................................10-3
10.2.3 How to Use Sampling Trace ..................................................................10-4
10.3 Time Constant Processing .................................................................... 10-6

11. Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ........................................ 11-1

11.1 Self-Diagnostic function......................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1 LED Display for Status Condition...........................................................11-2
11.1.2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs ................................................11-2
11.2 Troubleshooting..................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.1 If ERROR/ALARM LED is Flashing........................................................11-3
11.2.2 If ERROR LED is ON .............................................................................11-5
11.2.3 ALL LEDs are OFF.................................................................................11-5
11.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction ..............................................................11-6
11.2.5 A Protect Error Message Appears .........................................................11-7
11.2.6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN .................................................11-8

12. Precautions During Programming ............................................ 12-1

12.1 Use of Duplicated Output ...................................................................... 12-2
12.1.1 Duplicated Output ..................................................................................12-2
12.1.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP, SET or RST Instruction .....12-3
12.2 Handling BCD Data ............................................................................... 12-4
12.2.1 BCD Data ...............................................................................................12-4
12.2.2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC ..............................................................12-4
12.3 Handling Index Registers ...................................................................... 12-5
12.3.1 Index Registers ......................................................................................12-5
12.3.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers.................12-5
12.3.3 Example of Using an Index Register......................................................12-6
12.4 Operation Errors.................................................................................... 12-7
12.4.1 Outline of Operation Errors ....................................................................12-7
12.4.2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs................................12-7
12.4.3 Dealing with Operation Errors ................................................................12-7
12.4.4 Points to Check in Program ...................................................................12-8
12.5 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method.................................... 12-9
12.5.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method ....................................12-9
12.5.2 Operation and Precautions When RUN starts .....................................12-10
12.5.3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction ....................................12-11
 12.6 Precautions for Programming .............................................................. 12-12
12.7 Rewrite Function During RUN ............................................................. 12-13
12.7.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN........................................................12-13
12.7.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is Not Possible ...........................12-14
12.7.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN .............................12-16
12.8 Processing During Forced Input and Output ....................................... 12-18
12.8.1 Processing When Forced Input/Output is Initiated During RUN..........12-18

13. Specifications ............................................................................... 13-1

13.1 Table of Specifications........................................................................... 13-2
13.1.1 General Specifications ...........................................................................13-2
13.1.2 Control Specifications ............................................................................13-4
13.1.3 Communication Specifications...............................................................13-7
13.2 I/O Number Allocation............................................................................ 13-8
13.2.1 I/O Numbers for FP0R Control Unit .......................................................13-8
13.2.2 I/O Numbers for FP0 Expansion Unit.....................................................13-9
13.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants ................................................ 13-10
13.4 Power Supply Unit and I/O Link Unit Specifications ............................ 13-11
13.4.1 Power Supply Unit Specifications (AFP0634)......................................13-11
13.4.2 I/O Link Unit Specifications (AFP0732)................................................13-11

14. Dimensions and Others............................................................... 14-1

14.1 Dimensions ............................................................................................ 14-2
14.1.1 C10/C14 Control Unit (Terminal Block)..................................................14-2
14.1.2 C10/C14 Control Unit (Molex Connector) ..............................................14-3
14.1.3 C16 Control Unit (MIL Connector) .........................................................14-4
14.1.4 C32/T32/F32 Control Unit (MIL Connector)...........................................14-5
14.1.5 Power Supply Unit..................................................................................14-6
14.1.6 I/O Link Unit ...........................................................................................14-6
14.1.7 When Using DIN Rail .............................................................................14-6
14.2 Cable/Adapter Specifications................................................................. 14-7
14.2.1 Type of Cables .......................................................................................14-7
14.2.2 AFC8503/AFC8503S (DOS/V PC).........................................................14-7
14.2.3 AFC8513 (PC98 PC)..............................................................................14-8
14.2.4 AFC8521/AFC8523 (Programmer) ........................................................14-8
14.2.5 AFC85853 ( 9-pin (male) – 9-pin (female) .............................................14-8
14.2.6 AFB85813 (9-pin (male) – 25-pin (male) ...............................................14-9
14.2.7 AFB85843 (Straight cable for connecting a modem: 9-pin (male) – 25-pin
(male) ....................................................................................................14-9
14.2.8 AFC85305/AFC8531/AFC8532 (For extending for the tool port) ..........14-9
14.2.9 AIP81862N (RS232 port) .....................................................................14-10
14.2.10 AFP15205/AFP1523 (End-of-life (EOL) product) .............................14-10
14.2.11 AFP5520/AFP5523 (End-of-life (EOL) product) ................................14-10
14.2.12 AFP8550 (End-of-life (EOL) product).................................................14-11
Appendix ...................................................................................... 15-1

15.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special Data Registers... 15-3
15.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0R......................................................15-5
15.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0R...........................................15-11
15.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0R ...........................................15-21

15.2 Table of Basic Instructions .................................................................. 15-40

15.3 Table of High-level Instructions ........................................................... 15-48

15.4 Table of Error codes............................................................................ 15-68

15.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands ................................ 15-81

15.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD.................................................................... 15-82

15.7 ASCII Codes........................................................................................ 15-83

Before You Start
Operating environment (Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when
installing)
* Ambient temperature: 0 to +55°C
* Ambient humidity: 10 to 95 % RH (at 25 °C, non-condensing)
* For use in pollution Degree 2 environment.
* Do not use the unit in the following environments.
- Direct sunlight
- Sudden temperature changes causing condensation.
- Inflammable or corrosive gas.
- Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or saline matter.
- Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia
or caustic soda.
- Direct vibration, shock or direct drop of water.
- Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment,
radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.(100 mm or more)
Static electricity
- Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage.
- Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product.
Power supply
- Use a power supply wire that is twisted.
- The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line. However, it is
recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using an isolating transformer before
supplying the power.
- Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line, input/output device and operating device.
- If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective
element such as fuse. If an incorrect voltage is directly applied, the internal circuit may be damaged or
destroyed.
- Be sure to supply power to a control and an expansion unit from a single power supply. Turning on/off
of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously.
Power supply sequence
- Have the power supply sequence such that the power supply of the control unit turns off before the
power supply for input and output. If the input/output power supply is turned off before the control unit,
or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily, the controller detects change of input level, and might
conduct an unexpected operation.
Before turning on the power
When turning on the power for the first time, be sure to take the precautions given below.
- When performing installation, check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring, particularly
conductive fragments, adhering to the unit.
- Verify that the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and power supply voltage are all correct.
- Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws.
- Set the mode selector to PROG. mode.
Before entering a program
Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program. Refer to the respective tool
software manuals for the details of the operation procedure. (Tool software: FPWIN Pro, FPWIN GR)
Request concerninng program storage
To prevent the accidental loss of programs, the user should consider the following measures.
- Drafting of documents
To avoid accidentally losing programs, destroying files, or overwriting the contents of files, documents
should be printed out and then saved.
- Specifying the password carefully.
The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten. If the password is
forgotten, however, it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to. Also, if a password
is focibly bypassed, the program is deleted. When specifying the password, note it in the specifications
manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point.
Programming Tool Restrictions
Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units (as of April, 2009)

Type of programming tool Type of unit

Used
FPWIN GR Ver.2
Windows software (Ver.2.80 or later)

FPWIN GR Ver.1 Not used

Windows software Used
FPWIN Pro Ver.6
Conforms to IEC61131-3 (Ver.6.10 or later)
MS-DOS software NPST-GR Ver.4 Not used
(EOL product) NPST-GR Ver.3 Not used
AFP1113V2
Not used
AFP1114V2
AFP1113
Not used
Handy programming unit AFP1114
(EOL product) AFP1111A
AFP1112A
Not used
AFP1111
AFP1112
AFP8670 Used
FP memory loader
AFP8671 (Ver.2.0 or later)

Note: Precautions concerning version upgrade

- In case of using FPWIN GR Ver.1, please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver.2.
- FPWIN GR Ver2.0 can be upgraded to Ver.2.8 or later free of charge at our web site.
- In case of using FPWIN GR Ver.4 or Ver.5, please purchase upgrade model FPWIN Pro Ver.6.
- FPWIN Pro Ver.6.0 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site.
- The handy programming unit cannot be used.
Do not download any programs for other units such as FP1 to the FP0R using the handy programming
unit.

Panasonic Electric Works website address: http://panasonic-denko.co.jp/ac/

When Using FP0 Programs
The programs used on the existing FP0 can be used on the FP0R in the following 2 cases.

1. Use the programs in the FP0R specifications.

It enables to make maximum use of the performance and functions of the FP0R.

2. Use the programs in the same specifications as the FP0.

It enables to activate the programs in the same specifications as the exisitng FP0 (FP0 compatibility
mode).

The points to take care when using the FP0 programs on the FP0R are described below in the above 2
cases.

When using the programs in the FP0R specifications.

As the FP0 programs cannot be used as they are, it is required to modify the following 3 items for the
FP0 programs.

1. Change in the model setting

Change the model for the FP0 programs to the one for the FP0R.

2. Resetting of system registers

As the system registers will be initialized once the model setting is changed, reset the system registers if
necessary.

3. Modification of the programs

Depending on programs, they should be changed according to the specifications of FP0R.
Modify the programs if necessary.

Reference: Next page

<Differences Between Specifications of FP0 and FP0R Effecting Program Change>
When Using FP0 Programs
The programs used on the existing FP0 can be used on the FP0R in the following 2 cases.

1. Use the programs in the FP0R specifications.

It enables to make maximum use of the performance and functions of the FP0R.

2. Use the programs in the same specifications as the FP0.

It enables to activate the programs in the same specifications as the exisitng FP0 (FP0 compatibility
mode).

The points to take care when using the FP0 programs on the FP0R are described below in the above 2
cases.

When using the programs in the FP0R specifications.

As the FP0 programs cannot be used as they are, it is required to modify the following 3 items for the
FP0 programs.

1. Change in the model setting

Change the model for the FP0 programs to the one for the FP0R.

2. Resetting of system registers

As the system registers will be initialized once the model setting is changed, reset the system registers if
necessary.

3. Modification of the programs

Depending on programs, they should be changed according to the specifications of FP0R.
Modify the programs if necessary.

Reference: Next page

<Differences Between Specifications of FP0 and FP0R Effecting Program Change>
When using the FP0R in the same specifications as FP0
The FP0R supports an operation mode "FP0 compatibility mode". Using this mode enables to use the
programs of the existing FP0 as they are.
In the FP0 compatibility mode, items such as a program capacity, data memory capacity and usable
instructions can be operated in the same specifications as the FP0.

Note: The FP0 compatibility mode is not available for the F32 type.

How to use FP0 compatibility mode

Download the programs uploaded from the FP0 or the programs that the model code is created as the
FP0, using an applicable programming tool for the FP0R A confirmation message will be shown on the
tool, and the mode will be automatically changed to the FP0 compatibility mode.

Tools supporting FP0 compatibility mode

FPWIN GR Ver. 2.80 or later/FPWIN Pro Ver.6.10 or later

Restrictions on switching to FP0 compatibility mode

For downloading the FP0 programs to the FP0R in the FP0 compatibility mode, the model setting for the
FP0 programs should match the model type of the FP0R as the table below.

Model setting for FP0 program Applicable FP0R model

C10 C10RM, C10RS, C10CRM, C10CRS
C14 C14RM, C14RS, C14CRM, C14CRS
C16 C16T, C16P, C16CT, C16CP
C32 C32T, C32P, C32CT, C32CP
T32 T32T, T32P, T32CT, T32CP
Differences between the specifications of FP0 compatibility mode and FP0
Basically, the FP0 programs do not need to be modified to activate the FP0 programs in the FP0
compatibility mode, however, as for the following items, the specifications are different. Check the
contents, and change the programs if necessary.

1. P13(PICWT) instruction specifications - EEPROM(FROM) write instruction

The execution time of this instruction differs. Depending on the number of write blocks, the execution
time may be longer or shorter.
No. of write blocks (No. of words) FP0 FP0 compatibility mode
1 block (64 words) Approx. 5ms Approx. 100ms
2 blocks (128 words) Approx. 10ms Approx. 100ms
4 blocks (256 words) Approx. 20ms Approx. 100ms
8 blocks (512 words) Approx. 40ms Approx. 100ms
16 blocks (1024 words) Approx. 80ms Approx. 100ms
32 blocks (2048 words) Approx. 160ms Approx. 100ms
33 blocks (2112 words) Approx. 165ms Approx. 200ms
41 blocks (2624 words) Approx. 205ms Approx. 200ms
64 blocks (4096 words) Approx. 320ms Approx. 200ms
96 blocks (6144 words) Approx. 480ms Approx. 300ms
256 blocks (16320 words) Approx. 800ms Approx. 800ms

②F170(PWM) instruction specifications - PWM output instruction

The settable frequencies differ. Especially, the setting for the low frequency band cannot be specified.
FP0 FP0 compatibility mode
Setting
Frequency (Hz) Cycle (ms) Frequency (Hz) Cycle (ms)
H11 1000 1.0 1000 1
H12 714 1.4 750 1.3
H13 500 2.0 500 2
H14 400 2.5 400 2.5
H15 200 5.0 200 5
H16 100 10.0 100 10
H0 38 26.3 40 25
H1 19 52.6 20 50
H2 9.5 105.3 10 100
H3 4.8 208.3 6 166.7
H4 2.4 416.7 Cannot specify
H5 1.2 833.3 Cannot specify
H6 0.6 1666.7 Cannot specify
H7 0.3 3333.3 Cannot specify
H8 0.15 6666.7 Cannot specify
3. Data size of elapsed value and target value of pulse output and high-speed counter
The data size is changed.
FP0: 24 bits
FP0 compatibility mode: 32 bits

4. F144(TRNS) instruction specifications - Serial data communication

The following 2 items in the specifications for sending data are changed.
1)Processing of starting data of send buffer
FP0: Stores the number of unsent bytes every one-byte transmission.
FP0 compatibility mode: Stores 0 after the completion of all data transmission.

2)Restriction on the number of sent bytes

FP0: No restriction
FP0 compatibility mode: 2048 bytes

5. F169(PLS) instruction specifications - Pulse output (JOG operation)

The following 2 items in the specifications are changed.
1)"Operation mode and direction output" setting process
FP0: "00: No counting mode" is selectable.
FP0 compatibility mode: "00: No counting mode" is not selectable.
Performs the same operation as the one when specifying "10: Incremental counting mode with not
direction output".

2)Pulse width specification

FP0: It is possible to set the fixed pulse width (80μs) or duty ratio.
FP0 compatibility mode: The contents are invalid and the duty ratio of pulse width is fixed at 25%.

6. F168(SPD1) instruction specifications - Positioning control

The specifications during pulse output are changed.
FP0: Not count
FP0 compatibility mode: Count

7. Real number calculation process

As the accuracy of real number calculation has been improved, the calculation result in the FP0
compatibility mode may differ from the result in the existing FP0 program.

8. Process when a secondary battery is out of charge (T32 type only)

If the secondary battery installed in the T32 type is out of charge, the next power-on process will be
different.
FP0: The value in the hold area of data memory will be unstable.
FP0 compatibility mode: The value in the hold area of data memory will be cleared to 0.
Chapter 1
Functions and Restrictions of the Unit
1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit
Microcompact PLC which realizes high-speed processing with large-capacity memory.
Further high-speed processing and large capacity has been realized with the same body size as the FP0.
Basic capability is 0.58μs/basic instruction. Especially, for th eprograms up to 3k steps, the capability is
0.08μs/basic instruction. Also, the program capacity of 12k steps/32k steps and the data registers of 12k
words/32k words are provided, so that complex arithmetic processing can be executed.

Equipped with a USB 2.0 tool port.

The USB port supporting USB2.0 FullSpeed is equipped. It enables a high-pseed communication with
programming tools. As a very large program of 32k steps can be downloaded only in a few seconds, it
enables more efficient program development.

Large-capacity separate comment memory

A separate comment memory area is provided aside from the program area. I/O comments of 100,000
points can be stored. Program management and maintenance is easy. Also as the area is separated
from the program area, program development can be proceeded without concern for the capacity of
comment memory.

Enhancement of high-pseed counter and pulse output functions

- High-speed counter function
1 phase: Max. 50 kHz x 6 channels 2 phase: Max. 20 kHz x 3 channels

- Pulse output function

Max. 50 kHz x 4 channels Max. 50 kHz linear interpolation x 2 systems

･All the channels for the high-speed counter and pulse output can be controlled simultaneously.

･Supports various positioning functions.

Target speed change function 2. JOG positioning function

3. Deceleration stop function 4. Acceleration/deceleration time individual setting

function

1-2
An additional unit in the lineup, which enables the backup of all data without battery. (F32 type)
On the F32 type, all the data memories (internal relays, data registers, timer/counter) can be held without
battery. Maintainability is high as there is no danger of battery exhaustion.

A full range of communication functions

- Supports PC(PLC) link (supports MEWNET-W0).
- MEWTOCOL master function
- Supports MODBUS RTU (master/slave).
- General-purpose serial communication is available via the tool port/COM port (RS232C) both.

Supports the functions for rewriting and downloading programs during RUN.
It support the rewriting during RUN function which enabels to change programs of a maximum of 512
steps while the PLC is being running, and also supports the downloading during RUN function which
enables to rewrite all comments and programs. Because of these functions, programs can be updated
without stopping the system.

Enhanced security
It supports the 8-digit password (alphameric) and upload protection function, and the security has been
tightened more.

Fully supports FPWIN Pro.

It fully supports our Programming tool software FPWIN Pro. Using FPWIN Pro enables formalizing
program parts or multilingual programming, and it eases the management of programs as asset and the
maintenance.

FP0 compatibility
The FP0 compatibility mode enables the programs that have been used on the existing FP0 to be
activated on the FP0R as they are. Also, the shape and terminal layout is the same as the FP0, therefore,
there is no need to review the installation place or to change the wiring.

1-3
1.2 Unit Types

1.2.1 FP0R Control Units

Specifications
COM
Program Power
Type No. of I/O Connecti (RS232 Product No.
capacity supply Input Output
points on type C port)
voltage
Terminal
10 points ― AFP0RC10RS
16k 24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 6 points/
steps DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 4 points) ― AFP0RC10RM
connector
C10
Terminal
10 points Available AFP0RC10CRS
16k 24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 6 points/
steps DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 4 points) Available AFP0RC10CRM
connector
Terminal
14 points ― AFP0RC14RS
16k 24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 8 points/
steps DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 6 points) ― AFP0RC14RM
connector
C14
Terminal
14 points Available AFP0RC14CRS
16k 24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 8 points/
steps DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 6 points) Available AFP0RC14CRM
connector
Transistor
output: (NPN) ― AFP0RC16T
16 points (
16k 24V 24V DC 0.2A MIL
(Input: 8 points/
steps DC ±common Transistor connector
Output: 8 points)
output: (PNP) ― AFP0RC16P
0.2A
C16
Transistor
output: (NPN) Available AFP0RC16CT
16 points
16k 24V 24V DC 0.2A MIL
(Input: 8 points/
steps DC ±common Transistor connector
Output: 8 points)
output: (PNP) Available AFP0RC16CP
0.2A
Transistor
32 points output: (NPN) ― AFP0RC32T
32k (Input: 16 points/ 24V 24V DC 0.2A MIL
steps Output: 16 DC ±common Transistor connector
points) output: (PNP) ― AFP0RC32P
0.2A
C32
Transistor
output: (NPN) Available AFP0RC32CT
32 points
32k 24V 24V DC 0.2A MIL
(Input: 16 points/
steps DC ±common Transistor connector
Output: 16 point)
output: (PNP) Available AFP0RC32CP
0.2A
Transistor
32 points output: (NPN) Available AFP0RT32CT
32k (Input: 16 points/ 24V 24V DC 0.2A MIL
T32
steps Output: 16 DC ±common Transistor connector
points) output: (PNP) Available AFP0RT32CP
0.2A
Transistor
32 points output: (NPN) Available AFP0RF32CT
32k (Input: 16 points/ 24V 24V DC 0.2A MIL
F32
steps Output: 16 DC ±common Transistor connector
points) output: (PNP) Available AFP0RF32CP
0.2A

1-4
1.2.2 FP0 Expansion Units

Specifications
Product Power Product
Connection Part No.
name No. of I/O points supply Input Output No.
type
voltage
8 points 24V DC MIL
- - FP0-E8X AFP03003
(Input: 8 points) ±common connector
Terminal
8 points FP0-E8RS AFP03023
24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 4 points,
DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 4 points) FP0-E8RM AFP03013
connector
FP0-E8
8 points 24V Relay output: Terminal
Expansion - FP0-E8YRS AFP03020
(Output: 8 points) DC 2A block
unit
Transistor
8 points MIL
- - output: (NPN) FP0-E8YT AFP03040
(Output: 8 points) connector
0.1A
Transistor
8 points MIL
- - output: (PNP) FP0-E8YP AFP03050
(Output: 8 points) connector
0.1A
16 points 24V DC MIL
- - FP0-E16X AFP03303
(Input: 16 points) ±common connector
Terminal
16 points FP0-E16RS AFP03323
24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 8 points,
DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 8 points) FP0-E16RM AFP03313
connector
16 points Transistor
24V DC MIL
(Input: 8 points, - output: (NPN) FP0-E16T AFP03343
FP0-E16 ±common connector
Output: 8 points) 0.1A
Expansion
16 points Transistor
unit 24V DC MIL
(Input: 8 points, - output: (PNP) FP0-E16P AFP03353
±common connector
Output: 8 points) 0.1A
Transistor
16 points MIL
- - output: (NPN) FP0-E16YT AFP03340
(Output: 16 points) connector
0.1A
Transistor
16 points MIL
- - output: (PNP) FP0-E16YP AFP03350
(Output: 16 points) connector
0.1A
32 points Transistor
24V DC MIL
(Input: 16 points, - output: (NPN) FP0-E32T AFP03543
FP0-E32 ±common connector
Output: 16 points) 0.1A
Expansion
32 points Transistor
unit 24V DC MIL
(Input: 16 points, - output: (PNP) FP0-E32P AFP03553
±common connector
Output: 16 points) 0.1A

1-5
1.2.3 Intelligent Units
Product Exclusive
Product name Specifications Part No.
No. manual
FP0 Thermocouple K, J, T, R thermocouples, resolution: 0.1℃ FP0-TC4 AFP0420
ARCT1F366
unit K, J, T, R thermocouples, resolution: 0.1℃ FP0-TC8 AFP0421
<Input specifications>
No. of channels: 2 channels
Input range: Voltage: 0 to 5 V,
-10~+10V (Resolution: 1/4000)
FP0 Analog I/O unit Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000) FP0-A21 AFP0480 ARCT1F390
<Output specifications>
No. of channels: 1 channel
Output range: Voltage: -10 to +10 V (Resolution: 1/4000)
Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
<Input specifications>
No. of channels: 8 channels
FP0 A/D Converter
Input range: Voltage: 0 to 5 V, -10to+10V, -100 to 100 mV FP0-A80 AFP0401 ARCT1F321
unit
(Resolution: 1/4000)
Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
<Output specifications>
FP0-A04V AFP04121
No. of channels: 4 channels
FP0 D/A Converter
Output range: (Voltage output type): -10 to +10 V ARCT1F382
unit
(Resolution: 1/4000) FP0-A04I AFP04123
(Current output type): 4 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
FP0 RTD
(Resistance- Pt100､Pt1000､Ni1000
FP0-RTD6 AFP0430 ARCT1F445
temperature detector) Resolution: 0.1℃/0.01℃ (Switch type)
unit

1.2.4 Link Units

Power
Product Exclusive
Product name Specifications supply Part No.
No. manual
voltage
This unit is for making the FP0 function as a slave
unit of the CC-Link.
FP0 CC-Link Only one unit can be connected to the furthest
24V DC FP0-CCLS AFP07943 ARCT1F380
Slave unit right edge of the FP0 expansion bus.
Note) Accuracy will change if an FP0
thermocouple unit is used at the same time.
This is a link unit designed to make the FP0
FP0 I/O Link Unit function as a slave unit to MEWNET-F (remote I/O 24V DC FP0-IOL AFP0732 This manual
system).
This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of
C-NET Adapter
the computer link function for connecting to a host
S2 type - - AFP15402
cmputer via C-NET. It comes with a 30 cm FP0
(for FP0 side)
tool port cable. A power supply is not required.
ARCT1F96
This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of 100 to
- AFP8536
C-NET Adapter the computer link function for connecting to a 240V AC
(for computer side) network-connected PLC via C-NET from a host
24V DC - AFP8532
computer.
Connected with FP series PLCs, it conducts Ethernet
FP Web-Server2
communication, sends e-mail, and displays the PLC data on FP-WEB2 AFP0611 ARCT1F446
unit
HTML pages.

1-6
1.2.5 Power Supply Unit
Product name Specifications Part No. Product No.
Input voltage: 100 to 240 V AC Free input
FP0 Power supply unit FP0-PSA4 AFP0634
Output capacity: 0.7A, 24 V DC

1.2.6 Options and Repair Parts

Product name Specifications Product No.
Data clear type AFP8670
FP Memory loader
Data hold type AFP8671
Terminal screwdriver Relay output type. Necessary when wiring terminal blocks (Phoenix). AFP0806
Molex connector pressure Necessary when wiring relay output type and Molex connectors.
AFP0805
contact tool (MOLEX: 57189-5000)
Multi-wire connector
Necessary when wiring transistor output type connectors. AXY52000
pressure contact tool
FP0 Slim 30 type mounting
Mounting plate for mounting FP0R C32/T32/F32 on a panel vertically. AFP0811
plate
FP0 Slim type mounting
Mounting plate for mounting FP0 expansion unit on a panel vertically. AFP0803(10-pack)
plate
FP0 Flat type mounting plate Mounting plate for mounting Control unit on a panel horizontally. AFP0304 (10-pack)
Relay output Molex type I/O Loose-wiring cable (9 leads) AWG20, with Molex socket Length: 1 m AFP0551(2 cable set)
2
cable attached at one end, 0.5mm , 1 set: 2 cables (blue white) Length: 3 m AFP0553(2 cable set)
Transistor output type I/O Loose-wiring cable (10 leads) AWG22, with connector Length: 1 m AFP0521 (2 cable set)
2,
cable attached at one end,0.3mm 1 set: 2 cables (blue white) Length: 3 m AFP0523(2 cable set)
Terminal socket Attaches to relay outputand terminal block type. Maintenance parts AFP0802(2 cable set)
Molex socket Attaches to relay output and Molex connector type. Maintenance parts AFP0801(2 cable set)
Wire-press socket Attaches to transistor output type. Maintenance parts AFP0807(2 cable set)
FP0 Power supply cable Attaches to FP0 various units. Maintenance parts Length: 1m AFP0581(1-pack)
FP0R/FPΣ Power supply
Attaches to FP0R control unit. Maintenance parts. Length: 1m AFPG805 (1-pack)
cable

1-7
1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combination

Up to three expansion units can be added on the right of the FP0R, these expansion units being either
expansion units or intelligent units.
A combination of relay output and transistor output types is also possible.

Controllable I/O points

Type of No. of I/O points when When the expansion unit When the expansion unit
control unit using control unit is the same output type is a transistor output type
C10 10 points Max. 58 points Max. 106 points
C14 14 points Max. 62 points Max. 110 points
C16 16 points Max. 112 points Max. 112 points
C32
T32 32 points Max. 128 points Max. 128 points
F32

Note:
- Install the FP0 thermocouple unit on the right side of all other expansion units.
- If it is installed on the left side, the total precision will deteriorate.
- Install the FP0 CC-Link slave unit on the right side of all other expansion units. There is no expansion
connector on the right side.
- Install the FP0 RTD unit on the right side of all other expansion units.

1-8
1.4 Programming Tools

1.4.1 Required Tools for Programming

1.Programming tool software
- The tool software can also be used with the FP
series.
- "FPWIN GR Ver.2" or "FPWIN Pro Ver.6" Windows
software is used with FP0R.
FPWIN GR Ver.1x, MS-DOS NPST-GR and FP
Programmer cannot be used.

2.PC connection cable

- The connection cable for DOS/V machine is
available.
- A commercial miniUSB cable can be used for the
connection.

1.4.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable

Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver.2
OS
Type of software Hard disk capacity Product No.
(Operating system)

Full type AFPS10520

Windows®98
FPWIN GR Ver.2 Windows®ME
English-language Small type Windows®2000 40MB or more AFPS11520
menu Windows®XP
Windows Vista®
Upgrade version AFPS10520R

Note1) Ver.1.1 must be installed to install the upgrade version.

Note2) Ver.2.0 can be upgraded to Ver.2.1 or later free of charge at our web site
(http://panasonic-denko.co.jp/ac).
Use the latest version.
Note3) The small type can be used only for each series of FP-e, FPΣ, FP0 and FP-X.
Note4) If Windows 95 is being used, a USB cable cannot be used for the connection.

Conforms to IEC61131-3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver.6

Type of software OS (Operating system) Hard disk capacity Product No.
Windows®2000
FPWIN Pro Ver.6 English-
Windows®XP 100MB or more AFPS50560
language menu
Windows Vista®
Note1) The small type and upgrade version is not available for Ver.6.
Note2) Ver.6.0 can be upgraded to Ver.6.1 or later free of charge at our web site
(http://panasonic-denko.co.jp/ac).
Use the latest version.

1-9
Type of computer and suitable cable

For the connection between a personal computer (RS232C) and the control unit (RS232C)

D-sub connector cable

PLC side
Type of PC PLC side connector Specifications Product No.
connector
Female-Mini DIN round 5-pin L type (3 m) AFC8503
DOS/V machine D-sub 9-pin
Female-Mini DIN round 5-pin Straight type (3 m) AFC8503S
Note) A USB/RS232C onversion cable is necessary to connect with a personal computer without a serial
port using a PC connection cable.

For the connection between a personal computer (USB) and the control unit (USB)

USB cable
Use a commercial cable.
Cable type Length
USB 2.0 cable (A: miniB) Max. 5 m
Note) Windows®2000 or later OS is required for the communication with a USB.

Reference: <Chapter 6 Preparation of USB Port>

1-10
Chapter 2
Specifications and Functions of
Control Unit
2.1 Part Names and Functions

2.1.1 Part Names and Functions

Operation monitor LEDs

These LEDs display the current operation status of PLC such as RUN/STOP and ERROR/ALARM.
LED LED and operation status
Lights: In the RUN mode - The program is being executed.
RUN (Green) Flashes: The forced input/output is being executed in the RUN mode. (The RUN and
PROG. LEDs flash alternately.)
Lights: In the PROG. mode - The operation has stopped.
The forced input/output is being executed in the PROG. mode.
PROG. (Green)
Flashes: The forced input/output is being executed in the RUN mode. (The RUN and
PROG. LEDs flash alternately.)
Flashes An error is detected during the self-diagnostic function. (ERROR)
ERROR/ALARM
Lights A hardware error occurs, or operation slows because of the program, and
(Red)
the watchdog timer is activated. (ALARM)

2-2
 RUN/PROG. mode switch
This switch is used to change the operation mode of PLC.
Switch Operation mode
RUN (Position: Up) RUN mode :The program is executed and the operation begins.
PROG. (Position: Down) PROG. mode :The operation stops. In this mode, programming can be
done using a tool software.
- Switching between RUN and STOP can be also performed by the remote operation from a
programming tool.
- When performing remote switching from the programming tool, the setting of the mode switch and the
actual mode of operation may differ. Verify the mode with the status indicator LED.
- Restart the power supply to operate in the mode set with the RUN/PROG. mode switch.

USB connector (Mini-USB B type (5-pin))

This connector is used to connect a programming tool.
A commercial USB cable (USB2.0 cable (A: miniB)) can be used.

Tool port (RS232C)

This connector is used to connect a programming tool.
A commercial mini-DIN 5-pin connector is used for the tool port on the control unit.
Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction
1 Signal Ground SG -
2 Send Data SD Unit → External device
3 Receive Data RD Unit ← External device
4 (Not used) - -
5 +5 V +5 V Unit → External device

- The followings are the default settings when the unit is shipped from the factory. The system register
should be used to change these.
Baud rate 9600bps
Char. Bit 8 bits
Parity check Odd parity
Stop bit 1 bit
Note) The unit number of the tool port should be set by the system register.
Input connector

Input status LEDs

Output connector
Output indicator LEDs

Power supply connector (24 V DC)

Supply 24 V DC. It is connected using the power supply cable (AFPG805) supplied with the unit.
COM port (RS232C port) (C10CR､C14CR､C16C､C32C､T32C､F32C)
This port is used to connect equipment with RS232C to enable data input/output.
expansion hook
This hook is used to secure expansion units. The hook on the right side is also used for installation on
the flat-type mounting plate (AFP0804).
Right-side connector for FP0 expansion
This is used to connect the FP0-cum-FPΣexpnasion unit installed on the right side of control unit to the
internal circuit. (The connector is located under the seal.)

DIN hook
This hook enables the unit to attach to a rail at a touch. It is also used to install the unit on the slim 30
type mounting plate (AFP0803).
2-3
2.2 Input and Output Specifications

2.2.1 Input Specifications

Input specifications (for all types)
Item Description
Insulation method Optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
operating voltage range 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Rated input current Approx. 2.6 mA
For C10: 6 points/common
For C14, C16: 8 points/common
Output points per common For C32, T32, F32: 16 points/common
(Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be
connected to common terminal.)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/2 mA
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1.2 mA
Input impedance 9.1 kΩ
20 μs or less
OFF→ON Note) The input time constant can be set using system registers.
Response time
(0.1 ms to 64 ms)
ON→OFF Same as above
Operating mode indicator LED display
Note) This specification is applied when the rated input a voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25℃.

Limiations on number of simultaneous input on points

Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as
determined by the ambient temperature.

Circuit diagram

R1=9.1 kΩ R2=1 kΩ

2-4
2.2.2 Output Specifications
Transistor output specifications
Description
Item
NPN PNP
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 5 V DC to 24 V DC 24 V DC
Operating load voltage range 4.75 V DC to 26.4 V DC 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.2A
For C16: 8 points/common
Output points per common
For C32, T32, F32: 16 points/common
Off state leakage current 1 μA or less
On state voltage drop 0.2 V DC or less
OFF→ON 20 μs or less (Load current: 5 mA or more)
0.1 ms or less (Load current: 0.5 mA or more)
Response time
ON→OFF 40 μs or less (Load current: 5 mA or more)
0.2 ms or less (Load current: 0.5 mA or more)
External power Voltage 21.6V DC to 26.4V DC
supply Current C16: 30 mA or less C16:35 mA or less
(+ and - terminals) C32､T32､F32: 60 mA or less C32､T32､F32: 70 mA or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED display

Limiations on number of simultaneous output on points

Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as
determined by the ambient temperature.

Circuit diagram
[NPN] [PNP]

2-5
Relay output specifications (C10/C14)
Item Description
Output type 1a output
Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC､2 A 30 V DC (4.5 A or less/common) Note)
C10:2 points/common+1 point/common+1 point/common
Output points per common
C14:4 points/common+1 point/common+1 point/common
Response OFF → ON Approx. 10 ms
time ON → OFF Approx. 8 ms
Mechanical Min. 20,000,000 operations (Switching rate: 180 times/min.)
Lifetime Elecstrical Min. 100,000 operations (Switching rate: 20 times/min. at rated control
capacity)
Surge absorber None
Operating mode indicator LED display
Note) Resistance load

Circuit diagram

2-6
2.3 Terminal layout diagrams
Model No. Terminal layout diagrams
C10RS
C10CRS
C10RM
C10CRM

(The above illustration is the terminal block type.)

C14RS
C14CRS
C14RM
C14CRM

(The above illustration is the terminal block type.)

2-7
 Model No. Terminal layout diagrams
C16T
C16CT

Note: Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.

C16P
C16CP

Note: Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.

2-8
 Model
Terminal layout diagrams
No.
C32T
C32CT
T32CT
F32CT

Note: Four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.
Two (+) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.
Two (-) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.

C32P
C32CP
T32CP
F32CP

Note: Four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.
Two (+) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.
Two (-) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.

2-9
2.4 Backup Function and Clock/Calender Function of
FP0R-T32
The FP0R-T32 control unit has a secondary battery (Charging type).
The backup function for the operation memory and clock/calender function can be used.

2.4.1 Backup Function

Backup of operation memory
(1) Timer/Counter (T/C)
(2) Internal relays (R)
(3) Data Registers (DT)
(4) Step ladders

The range specified with a programming tool is the hold area to be backed up.
If the range is not specified, it will be the area of the default.
Note) If the battery is out of charge and the hold area becomes indefinite, the value in the hod area will
be cleared to 0 when the power supply is turned on again.

Key Point:
Programs and system registers will be held in the internal ROM regardless of the built-in back up battery.

2-10
2.4.2 Clock/Calender
The clock/calender function is available for the FP0R-T32.
Note) As the value is unstable in the initial state, write the value using a programming tool.

Area of clock/calender
With the clock/calender function, data indicating the hour, minute, second, day, year and other
information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission
instruction and used in sequence programs.
Special data
Higher bytes Lower bytes Reading Writing
register No.
Hour data Minute data
DT90053 Available Not available
H00 to H23 H00 to H59
Minute data Second data
DT90054 Available Available
H00 to H59 H00 to H59
Day data Hour data
DT90055 Available Available
H01 to H31 H00 to H23
Year data Month data
DT90056 Available Available
H00 to H99 H01 to H12
Day-of-the-week data
DT90057 - Available Available
H00 to H06

Setting of Clock/Calender Function

Setting using a programming tool
Using FPWIN GR
1.Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the
samte time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2.Select "Set PLC Data and Time" under "Tool" on the menu bar.

Set PLC Date and Time dialog box

The above steps display the "Set PLC Date and Time dialog
box" shown at the left. Input the date and time, and click on the
"OK" button.

Using FPWIN Pro

1. Select [Online Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [Shift] and [Esc] keys at the
samte time, to switch to the [Online Mode] screen.
2. Select "Special Relay/Special Data Register" under "Monitor" on the menu bar.
3. The screen will appear to set various parameters.

2-11
Setting and changing using program
(1) The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057, which are allocated as the
clock/calender setting area, are sent.
(2) A value of H8000 is written to DT90058.
Note) The value can be sent using the differential instruction "DF", or by changing H8000 to H0000.

Example showing the date and time bing written

Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on.

Note: As the value is unstable in the initial state, write the value using a programming tool.
As a day of the week is not automatically set on programming tools, fix what day is set to
00, and set the value for 00.

Example showing the clock/calender being used

Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start
In the example shown here, the clock/calender function is used to output (Y0) signal for one second, at
8:30 a.m. every day.
Here, the "Hour/minute" data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at
the appointed time.

- The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits, in the
BCD format.
- This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time (BCD), and the R900B (=flag) special
internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time.

2-12
2.4.3 Built-in Backup Battery
Time the built-in backup battery can be used (Backup time)
The built-in backup battery is not charged when the unit is shipped.
Charge the battery surfficiently before use. (Full charge (Ambient temperature: 25℃): 72 hours)
It will be charged automatically if the DC power is supplied to the control unit.

Relation between charging time and backup time

The number of days in the backup time varies according to the rate of charging time.

If it is charged on a full charge (72 hours) at the ambient temperature of 25℃, the bakup time will
be approx. 50 days.

The backup time will vary according to the ambient temperature when the battery is charged.
Ambient temperature when charged Number of days in backup time
70 °C Approx. 14 days
-20 °C Approx. 25 days

Predicted life of built-in backup battery

The life of the built-in backup battery varies according to the ambient temperature while the control unit is
on (energized).
Note) The temperature when the control unit is off (not powered) has little influence on the battery life.

Ambient temperature Lifetime of built-in backup battery

55 °C Approx. 430 days <Approx. 1 year>
45 °C Approx. 1200 days <Approx. 3 years>
40 °C Approx. 2100 days <Approx. 6 years>
35 °C Approx. 3300 days <Approx. 9 years>
34 °C or lower Approx. 10 years

Note: The built-in backup battery cannot be replaced.

2-13
2-14
Chapter 3
Expansion
3.1 Expansion Method
The FP0 expansion units (expansion I/O unit, high-performance unit) are connected to the right side of
the contorl Unit.
Unit expansion is done using the right-side connector for FP0 expansion and the expansion hooks on the
side of the unit.

(1) Peel the seal on the right side of the unit to expose the internal right-side connector for the
FP0 expansion.

(2) Using a screwdriver or similar tool, pull out the top and bottom expansion hooks.

(3) Align the pins and holes in teh four corners of the control unit and expansion unit, and insert
the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units.

(4) Press down the expansion hooks raised in Step (2) to secure the unit.

3-2
3.2 Part Names and Functions
Expansion Units

Part Names and Functions

Power supply connector
Supply 24 V DC. It is connected using the cable (AFP0581) supplied with the unit.
Input connector
Input indicator LED
Output connector
Output indicator LEDs
Expansion hook
This hook is used to secure expansion units.
Expansion connector
This connector is used to connect an expansion unit and internal circuit.
DIN hook
This hook enables the unit to attach to a rail at a touch. It is also used to install the unit on the slim type mounting
plate (AFP0803).
3-3
3.3 Input and Output Specifications
(1)Input specifications
Item Specifications
Insulation method Optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Rated input current Approx. 4.3 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
Operating voltage range 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Input point per common E8X/E16P/E16T 8 points/common
(Either the positive or negative of E32T/E16X 16 points/common
the inptu power supply can be
E8R 4 points/common
connected to common terminal.)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/3 mA
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1 mA
OFF → ON 2 ms or less
Response time
ON → OFF 2 ms or less
Operating mode indicator LED display

Limiations on number of simultaneous input on points

Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined
by the ambient temperature.

3-4
(2) Output specifications
Relay type output specifications
E8RS/E8RM/E8YRS/E16RS/E16RM
Item Description
Output type 1a relay output
Rated control capacity: 2 A 250 V AC､2 A 30 V DC (Max. 4.5 A or less/common) Note)
Output points per E8R 4 points/common
common E16R, E8YR 8 points/common
OFF → ON Approx. 10 ms
Response time
ON → OFF Approx. 8 ms
Mechanical Min. 20,000,000 operations
Lifetime
Electrical Min. 100,000 operations
Surge absorber None
Operating mode indicator LED display
Note) Resistance load

Transistor type output specifications

(NPN output type: E8YT/E16YT/E16T/E32T)
(PNP output type: E8YP/E16YP/E16P/E32P)
Description
Item
NPN PNP
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 5 V DC to 24 V DC 24 V DC
Operating load voltage range 4.75 V DC to 26.4 V DC 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.1 A/point (Max. 1 A per common)
Max. surge current 0.3 A
Output points per E16T, E8Y 8 points/common
common E32, E16Y 16 points/common
Off state leakage current 100 μA or less
On state voltage drop 1.5V or less
External power Voltage 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
supply (for driving
Current 3 mA/1 point
internal circuit)
OFF→ON 1 ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 1 ms or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED display

3-5
3.4 Terminal layout diagram
Model No. Terminal layout diagrams
E8RS
E8RM

E16RS
E16RM
E8YRS

3-6
 Model
Terminal layout diagrams
No.
E8X
E16T
E8YT

Note: Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.

E16X
E32T
E16YT

Note: Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.
Two (+) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.
Two (-) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.

3-7
 Model
Terminal layout diagrams
No.
E16P
E8YP

Note: Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.

E32P
E16YP

Note: Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.
Two (+) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.
Two (-) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.

3-8
Chapter 4
I/O Allocation
4.1 I/O Allocation

Note) The usable I/O numbers are different depending on the units.

Regarding I/O number

Specifying X and Y numbers
On the FP0R, the same numbers are used for input and output.

Expression of numbers for input/output relays

Since input relay "X" and output relay "Y" are handled in units of 16 points, they are expressed as a
combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below.

4-2
4.2 I/O Allocation for FP0R Control Unit

4.2.1 I/O Numbers of FP0R Control Unit

The I/O allocation of FP0R control unit is fixed.
Type of control unit Number of allocation I/O number
Input (6 point) X0 to X5
C10
Output (4 points) Y0 to Y3
Input (8 points) X0 to X7
C14
Output (6 points) Y0 to Y5
Input (8 points) X0 to X7
C16
Output (8 points) Y0 to Y7
Input (16 points) X0 to XF
C32/T32/F32
Output (16 points) Y0 to YF

4-3
4.3 I/O Numbers of FP0 Expansion Unit
･I/O numbers do not need to be set as I/O allocation is automatically performed when an expansion unit
is added.
･The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.
Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion
Type of unit
allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3
FP0-E8X Input (8 points) X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
Input (4 points) X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63
FP0-E8R
Output (4 points) Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63
FP0-E8YT/P
Ouput (8 points) Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
FP0-E8YR
FP0 Expansion
FP0-E16X Input (16 points) X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
unit
FP0-E16R Input (8 points) X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
FP0-E16T/P Output (8 points) Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
FP0-E16YT/P Output (16 points) Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
Input (16 points) X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
FP0-E32T/P
Output (16 points) Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
Input (16 points) WX2 WX4 WX6
CH0 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 Analog I/O Input (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-A21
unit CH1 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output (16 points)
(Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
FP0 A/D Input (16 points) WX2 WX4 WX6
FP0-A80
conversion unit CH0, 2, 4, 6 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0-TC4
FP0 Thermocouple Input (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-TC8
unit CH1, 3, 5, 7 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WX2 WX4 WX6
Input (16 points)
(X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 D/A FP0-A04V Output (16 points) WY2 WY4 WY6
conversion unit FP0-A04I CH0, 2 (Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
Output (16 points) WY3 WY5 WY7
CH1, 3 (Y30 to Y3F) (Y50 to Y5F) (Y70 to Y7F)
Input (32 points) X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F
FP0 I/O link unit FP0-IOL
Output (32 points) Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F
FP0 RTD unit Output (16 points) WX2 WX4 WX6
CH0, 2, 4 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
Output (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-RTD
CH1, 3, 5 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output (16 points)
(Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
- The data for the each channels of FP0 A/D conversion unit (FP0-A80), FP0 thermocouple unit (FP0-
TC4/FP0-TC8) and FP0 D/A conversion unit (FP0-A04V/FP0-A04I) is converted and loaded with a user
program that includes a switching flag to convert the data.
- Regarding FP0 CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.

4-4
Chapter 5
Installation and Wiring
5.1 Installation

5.1.1 Installation Environment and Space

Operating environment
(Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing)
- Ambient temperature: 0 to +55 ℃
- Ambient humidity: 10 to 95 % RH (at 25 ℃, non-condensing)
- For use in pollution Degree 2 environment.

- Do not use the unit in the following environments.

- Direct sunlight
- Sudden temperature changes causing condensation.
- Inflammable or corrosive gas.
- Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or saline matter.
- Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia
or caustic soda.
- Direct vibration, shock or direct drop of water.
- Influence from power transmission ilnes, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment,
radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.(100 mm or
more)

Static electricity
- Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage.
- Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product.

Measures regarding heat discharge

Always install the unit oriented with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the
generation of heat.

- Do not install the unit as shown below.

- Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters, transformers or large scale
resistors.
5-2
Installation space
- Leave at least 50 mm of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat
radiation and unit replacement.

- Maintain at least 100 mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when
installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit.

- Leave at least 100 mm of space from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room for
programming tool connections and wiring.

5.1.2 Installation and Removal

Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail
The unit can be simply attached to DIN rail.

Procedure of installation
(1) Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail.

(2) Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower hook to fit
the unit into position.

Procedure of removal
(1) Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever.

(2) Pull the attachment lever downwards.

(3) Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail.

5-3
5.1.3 Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate
When using the slim type FP0 mounting plate (AFP0803) (for mounting FP0)
Use M4 size pan-head screws for attachment of the mounting plate and install according to the
dimensions shown below.

The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails.

Note:
When using an expansion unit, tighten the screws after joining all of the mounting plate to be connected.
Tighten the screws at each of the four corners.
[Example] When using the maximum numbers of the expansion units (with AFP0811, AFP0803)

5-4
When using the flat type mounting plate (AFP0804)
Use M4 size pan-head screws for attachment of the mounting plate and install according to the
dimensions shown below.

Raise the expansion hooks of the unit. Align the expnasion hooks with the mounting plate and press the
hooks.

An unit with an attached mounting plate can also be installed sideways on a DIN rail.

Note:
The flat type mounting plate (AFP0804) should be used only with the control unit as a stand-alone unit.
It should not be used when the unit is being used in combination with an FP0 expansion unit.

5-5
5.2 Wiring of Power Supply

5.2.1 Wiring of Power Supply

Power supply wiring for the unit

Use the power supply cable (Part number: AFPG805) that comes with the unit to connect the power
supply.
Brown: 24 V DC
Blue: 0 V
Green: Function earth
Power supply wire
To minimize adverse effects from noise, twist the brown and blue wires of teh power supply cable.
Power supply type
- To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line, use an insulated power
supply with an internal protective circuit.
- The regulator on the unit is a non-insulated type.
- If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit, always make sure power is
supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse.
Power supply voltage
Rated voltage 24V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6V DC to 26.4V DC
Wiring system
- Isolate the wiring systems to the control unit, input/output devices, and mechanical power apparatus.

Measures regarding power supply sequence

- The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the
input/output power supplies.
- If the input/output power supplies are turned off before the power to the control unit, the unit will detect
the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation.
- Be sure to supply power to the control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply, and turn
the power on and off simultaneously for both.
5-6
5.2.2 Grounding
In situations of excess noise
Under normal conditions, the inherent noise resistance is sufficient. However, in situations of excess
noise, ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.

Exclusive grounding
- The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Ω.
- The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC as possible. The ground wire should be as short
as possible.
- If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always use an exclusive
ground for each device.

Note:
Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used, grounding may cause problems.

Since the power supply line of the FP0 expansion unit is connected to the function earth through a
varistor, if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth, the varistor may be
shorted.
As for the FP0R control unit, since its power supply line is connected to the function earth through a
high-voltage capacitor, it is no problem.

Do not ground the function earth terminal when grounding a plus (+) terminal of the power.
Do not ground the FP0R function earth terminal when grounding a plus (+) terminal of the pwer.
In some computers, the SG terminal of RS232C port and connector shielding are connected.
In addition, an FP0R tool port shielding and function earth terminal are connected.
Therefore, the GND terminal of FP0R and the function earth terminal are connected if the computer is
connected.
Especially when the FP0R is connected to a computer with a plus (+) terminal grounded, the GND
terminal is in the state that the voltage of -24 V is applied. As a result, short circuit occurs which may
lead to the breakage of FP0R and its neighboring parts if the GND terminal is connected to the earth
terminal in that state.

5-7
5.3 Wiring of Input and Output

5.3.1 Input Wiring

Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor
Relay output type ﾟ NPN open collector output type

Voltage output type Two-wire output type ﾟ

Precaution when using LED-equipped reed switch

When a LED is connected in series to an input
contact such as LED-equipped reed switch,
make sure that the voltage applied to the PLC
input terminal is greater than the ON voltage. In
particular, take care when connecting a number
of switches in series.

Precaution when usign two-wire type sensor

If the input of PLC does not turn off because of
leakage current from the two-wire type sensor
"photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor", the
use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as
shown on the left.
The formula is based on an input impedance of
9.1 kΩ. The input impedance varies depending
on the input terminal number.

5-8
Precaution when using LED-equipped limit switch
If the input of PLC does not turn off because of
leakage current from the LED-equipped limit
switch, the use of a bleeder resistor is
recommended, as shown on the left.

5-9
5.3.2 Output Wiring
Protective circuit for inductive loads
- With an inductive load, a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load.
- When switching DC inductive loads with relay output, be sure to connect a diod across the ends of the
load.

When using an AC inductive load (Relay output type)

When using an DC nductive load

Precautions when using capacitive loads

When connecting loads with large in-rush currents, to minimize their effect, connect a protection circuit
as shown below.

Use an external fuse as overload protection

A fuse is not built in the output circuit. It is recommended to install external fuses on every circuit, in
order to prevend the output ciruict to be burned out when the output is shorted. However, in some cases
such as shortcircuit, the element of the unit may not be protected.

5.3.3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings

Separate the input, output, and power lines
- Be sure to select the thickness (dia.) of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the
required current capacity.
- Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated, and these wirings are separated
from the power wiring, as much as possible. Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up
together.
- Separate the input/output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm.

5-10
5.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type
Supplied connector and suitable wires
The connector listed below is supplied with the unit. Use the suitable wires given below. Also, use the
required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires.

Suitable wires (Twisted wire)

Size Nominal cross-sectional area Insulation thickness Rated current
AWG#22 0.3mm2
Dia. 1.5 to dia. 1.1 3A
AWG#24 0.2mm2

Supplied connector (AFP0807)

Manufacturer Type and product No.
Housing 10-pin type only
Panasonic Electric
Semi-cover AXW61001A
Works, Co., Ltd.
Contact AXW7221(For AWG#22, #24)

Pressure connection tool

Manufacturer Product No.
Panasonic Electric Works, Co., Ltd AXY52000

Key Point:
If using a MIL connector for flat cables, specify the product No. AXM110915.
In this case, the suitable wire is AWG#28 and the rated current is 1 A.

5-11
Wiring method
The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire's insulation, saving labor.

(1) Bend the welder (contact) back from the carrier, and set it in the pressure connection tool.

(2) Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops, and lightly grip the tool.

(3) After press-fitting the wire, insert it into the housing.

(4) When all wires has been inserted, fit the semi-cover into place.

If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure-connected, the contact puller pin provided
with the fitting can be used to remove the contact.

5-12
5.5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type
Attached terminal block/Suitable wires
A screw-down connection type is used for the terminal block. The suitable wires are given below.

Terminal block socket

The terminal sockect manufactured by Phoenix Contact is used.
Model No. of Phoenix Contact
No. of pins
Model No. Product No.
9 pins MC1,5/9-ST-3,5 1840434

Suitable wires (Twisted wire)

Size Nominal cross-sectional area
AWG#24 to 16 0.2mm2 to 1.25mm2

Pole terminals with compatible insulation sleeve

If a pole terminal is being used, the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co. should be
used.
Manufacturer Cross-sectional area Size Phoenix Contact model No.
0.25mm2 AWG#24 AI 0,25―6 YE
0.50mm2 AWG#20 AI 0,5―6 WH
0.75mm2 AWG#18 AI 0,75―6 GY
Phoenix Contact Co.
1.00mm2 AWG#18 AI 1―6 RD
2 AI―TWIN 2×
0.5mm ×2 AWG#20 (for 2 pcs)
0.5―8 WH

Pressure welding tool for pole terminals

Model No. of Phoenix Contact
Manufacturer
Model No. Product No.
Phoenix Contact Co. CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436

For tightening the terminal block

When tightening the terminals of the terminal block, use a screwdriver (Phoenix Contact Co., Product No.
1205037) with a blade size of 0.4 x 2.5 (Part No. SZS 0,4x2,5).
The tightening torque should be 0.22 to 0.25 N m (2.3 to 2.5 kgf-cm) or less.

5-13
Wiring method

(1) Remove a potion of the wire's insulation.

②Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket, and then
tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place. (The tightening torque: 0.22 to 0.25 N m (2.3
to 2.5 kgf-cm))

Notes for wiring

- When removing the wire's insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire.
- Do not twist the wires to connect them.
- Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration.
- After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire.
- In the terminal block socket construciton, if the wire is fastened upon counter-clockwise rotation of the
sccrew, the connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the
wire.

5-14
5.6 Wiring of Molex Connector Type
Supplied connector and suitable wires
The connector listed below is supplied with the unit. Use the suitable wires given below. Also, use the
required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires.

Supplied connector
Manufacturer Molex Japan model No.
Housing 51067-0900 2 pcs
Japan Molex Co., Ltd.
Contact 50217-8100 20 pcs

Suitable wires (Twisted wire)

Size Cross-sectional area Insulation thickness
AWG#24~18 0.2mm2~0.75mm2 Dia. 1.4 to dia. 3.0

Pressure connection tool

Manufacturer Molex Japan model No.
Japan Molex Co., Ltd. 57189-5000

Wiring method
(1) Remove a potion of the wire's insulation.

(2) Place the contact in the crimping tool, place the wire in the contact tne lightly squeeze the tool

(3) Insert the crimped wire into the housing until it contacts the back side.

(4) Whe rmoving the wire, use a flat-head screwdriver, or other similar tool, to pull up the hold-down pin
of the housing and then pull out the wire.

5-15
5.7 Wiring of COM Port (RS232C Port)
Terminal block/Suitable wires
A screw-down connection type is used for the COM port (RS232C port). Use the suitable wires given
below.

Terminal block
The communication connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact is used.
Phoenix Contact model No.
No. of pins
Model No. Product No.
3 pins MKDS1/3-3.5 1751400

Suitable wires (Twisted wire)

Size ﾞ Cross-sectional area
AWG#28 to 16 0.08mm2 to 1.25mm2
Use the above wires shielded. it is recommended to ground the shielded part. Also, if usign a pole
terminal, refer to "5-5. Wiring of Terminal Block Type".

5-16
Wiring method
(1) Remove a potion of the wire's insulation.｡

(2) Insert the wire into the COM port (RS232C port) until it contacts the back side.

(3) Tighten the screw.

For tightening the terminal block

When tightening the COM port (RS232C port), use a screwdriver (Phoenix Contact Co., Product No.
1205037) with a blade size of 0.4 x 2.5 (Part No. SZS 0,4x2,5). The tightening torque should be 0.22 to
0.25 N•m (2.3 to 2.5 kgf-cm) or less.

Notes for wiring

1. When removing the wire's insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire.
2. Do not twist the wires to connect them.
3. Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration.
4. After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire.
5. In the terminal block socket construciton, if the wire is fastened upon counter-clockwise rotation of the
sccrew, the connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the
wire.

5-17
5.8 Safety Measures

5.8.1 Safety Measures

Precautions regarding system design
On the system using PLC, malfunction may occur for the following reasons:｡

- Power on timing differences between the PLC and input/output or mechanical power apparatus.
- Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs.
- Abnormality in the PLC unit, external power supply, or other devices.

In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown, choose the adequate safety measures
listed in the following:

Interlock circuit
When a motor clockwise/counter-clockwise operation is controlled, provide an interlock circuit externally.

Emergency stop circuit

Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device.

Start up sequence
The PLC should be started after booting the I/O device and mechanical power apparatus. To keep this
sequence, the following measures are recommended.
- Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG. mode, and then switch to the RUN mode.
- Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized.
Note) In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also, have the input/output devices turned off after the
PLC has stopped operating.

Grounding
When installing the controller next to devices that generate high voltages from switching, such as
inverters, do not ground them together. Use an exclusive ground for each device.

5.8.2 Momentary Power Failures

Operation of momentary power failures
If the duration of the power failure is less than 5 ms, the FP0R continues to operate. If the power is off for
5 ms or longer, operation changes depending on the combination of units, the power supply voltage, and
other factors.
(In some cases, operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset.)

5.8.3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections

Power supply
An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used. The power supply for the
control unit operation is a non-insulated circuit, so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied, the internal
circuit may be damaged or destroyed.
If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective
element such as fuse.

Protection of output
If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a
coil shorting in an electromagnetic device, a protective element such as a fuse should be attached
externally.

5-18
Chapter 6
Preparation of USB Port
6.1 USB Connection
Connectingt the unit with a personal computer using the USB cable enables the communication with our
software such a FPWIN GR.

Necessary items for the connection

About PC
The PC with the following OS is necessary to connect the FP0R with the USB.

Windows®2000
Windows®XP
Windows Vista®

Note: The FP0R cannot be connected with the USB cable when using Windows other than the
above.

About programming tool

FPWIN GR: Ver. 2.80 or later version

FPWIN Pro: Ver. 6.10 or later version

About USB cable

A commercial cable is necessary.
USB 2.0 cable (A: miniB) Max. 5 m

About USB HUB

A USB HUB cannot be used for the connection.

6-2
6.1.1 Installation of USB Driver
USB drivers must be installed to connect the unit with the USB.
The installation procedures differ depending on the OS in the PC to be used.

Note:
For the PC with more than one connector, it may be requested to reinstall these two drivers if the
positions of the USB connectors are changed. In that case, reinstall the drivers.

With Windows® XP
1. Turn on the power supply of the FP0R, and connect the FP0R with a PC using the USB cable.

2. After the connection, the PC recognize the USB driver automatically. As the following message
is shown, select "No, not this time", and click "Next".

3. As the following message is shown, select "Install from a list of specific location", and click
"Next".

6-3
4. Select “Search for the best driver in these locations.”, and check “Include this location in the
search”. Then, input the folder name below.
｢C:\Program Files\Panasonic-EW Control\FP0R USB\2000_XP｣
Uncheck the other items. Then, click "Next".

5. The installation of the USB driver starts.

Although an alart for the Windows log testing is indicated during the installation, click
"Continue Anyway" to continue the installation.

6.The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes.
Click "Finish".

The installation of the USB driver has been completed.

6-4
6.1.2 Confirming COM Ports
The USB connected to the FP0R is recognized by the PC as a COM port. It depends on your PC
environment to which COM port the USB is allocated. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the COM port
number allocated.

Procedure for displaying Device Manager

Displaying Device Manager
Displays Device Manager when the FP0R is connected to the PC with the USB cable.
The display method varies depending on the OS in the PC to be used.

With Windows® XP
"My computer" → "View System information" → Click "Hardware" tab → Click "Device Manager"

With Windows® 2000

"My computer" → "Control panel" → "System" → Click "Hardware" tab → Click "Device manager" →
Click "View" menu → "Device by type"

6-5
Procedure for confirming COM ports
1. Display "Device Manager".

2. Double-click "Ports (COM & LPT)". As the table of allocation of COM ports is shown, confirm
the COM port number.

"Panasonic Electric Works PLC Virtual UART(COMn)" is the allocated COM port.

COM4 is allocated in the following display.

Key Point: The COM port number is necessary for the connection with the FPWIN GR, etc.

6-6
6.1.3 Communication with Programming Tool
The following communication setting should be specified to perform the communication with a
programming tool (FPWIN GR/FPWIN Pro) using the USB.

1. Display the "Communication Setting" window from the programming tool.

<Using FPWIN GR>
Select "Communication Setting" under "Option" from the menu bar.
<Using FPWIN Pro>
Select "Communication Setting" under "Online" from the menu bar.

2. Specify the communication setting as the table below. Once the setting has been completed,
the communication with the USB becomes available.

Network type C-NET(RS232C)

Port No. COM port number allocated for the USB
Baud rate The baud rate cannot be specified. Even if any rate is selected, the setting will be
invalid.
(USB2.0 FullSpeed)
Data length 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
Parity Odd

6-7
6.1.4 Restrictions on USB Communication
There are restrictions on the USB Communication.

- For connection the FP0R with the USB, a personal computer which supports USB with the OS
supporting the USB (Windows2000/XP/Vista) is required.

- The FP0R connected to the USB is recognized by the PC as that is connected through the COM
port.

- The COM port number of the COM port allocated for the USB is fixed unless you change the
number.

- When multiple FP0R units are connected to one PC with the USB, they cannot communicate
with the PC simultaneously.
The PC can communicate with the FP0R that was connected first only, and it cannot
communicate with the other FP0R.

6-8
Chapter 7
Communication
7.1 Functions and Types

7.1.1 Communication Modes and Communication Ports

On the FP0R, four different communication modes are available.
According to the communication mode to be used, the usable communication ports vary.
Communication mode Usable communication port
Computer link Tool port
USB port
COM port (RS232C port)
General-purpose serial Tool port
communication COM port (RS232C port)
PC(PLC) link COM port (RS232C port)
MODBUS RTU COM port (RS232C port)

7.1.2 Computer Link

- Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC. Instructions
(command messages) are transmitted to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages)
based on the instructions received.
- A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used to exchange data between the
computer and the PLC.
- The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer, so no program is
necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication.

7.1.3 General-purpose Serial Communication

- With general-purpose serial communication, data can be sent back and forth between an external
device connected to the communication port such as an image processing devcie and a bar code
reader.
- Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP0R, while reading and writing of
data from an external is handled through the data registers.

7-2
7.1.4 PC(PLC) Link
The FP0R supports a link system which connects PC(PLC) link (max. 16 units) corresponding to
MEWNET-W0, using a twsited-pair cable.
- Data is shared between the PLCs connected with the PC(PLC) link, using exclusive internal relays "link
relays (L)" and data registers "link registers (LD)".

7.1.5 MODBUS RTU

Function overview
- The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP0R and other devices
(including our FP-e, Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit).
- Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave
units and the slave units respond (response messages) according to the instructions.
- Enables the communication between the devices of max. 255 units as the master function and slave
function is equipped.
Master function

Slave function

7-3
7.2 Communicaton Port Type

7.2.1 Tool Port

This connector is used to connect a programming tool.
A commercial mini-DIN 5-pin connector is used for the tool port on the control unit.
Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction
1 Signal Ground SG -
2 Send Data SD Unit → External device
３ Receive Data RD Unit ← Externaldevice
４ (Not used) - -
５ +5 V +5 V Unit → Externaldevice

7.2.2 USB Port

This connector is used to connect a programming tool.

A commercial USB2.0 calbe (A: miniB)) can be used.

Standard USB2.0
connector shape USB miniB type
Note) The USB driver should be installed.

Note: <Chapter 6 Preparation for USB Port>

7.2.3 COM Port (RS232C Port)

It is a screw down connection type terminal block (3-pin). Wire for use it.
Pin No. Signal name Name
S SD Send Data (Output)
R RD Receive Data (Input)
G SG Signal Ground

Note: For information on the wiring, refer to <5.7 Wiring of COM Port (RS232C Port)>
7-4
7.3 Communication Specifications
Tool Port
Description
Interface RS232C
Transmission distance 15 m
Baud rate 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 bit/s
Communication method Half-duplex communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Data length: 7 bits/8bits
Parity: None/Even/Odd
Communication format Start code: STX/No STX
End code: CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
Data transmission order Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Computer link (slave)
Communication mode Modem initialization
General-purpose communication (only in RUN mode)

USB port
Description
Standard (Baud rate) USB2.0 Fullspeed
Communication mode Computer link (slave)

COM port (RS232C port)

Description
Interface RS232C
Transmission distance 15 m
Baud rate 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 bit/s
Communication method Half-duplex communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Data length: 7 bits/8bits
Parity: None/Even/Odd
Communication format Start code: STX/No STX
End code: CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
Data transmission order Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Computer link (master/slave)
Modem initialization
Communication mode General-purpose communication
MODBUS RTU (master/slave)
PC(PLC) link

Factory default settings

Baud rate Data length Parity Stop bit
Tool port 9600 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit
COM port (RS232C port) 9600 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit

7-5
7.4 Communication Function 1: Computer Link

7.4.1 Overview
- Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC. Instructions
(command messages) are transmitted to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages)
based on the instructions received.
- A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used to exchange data between the
computer and the PLC.
- The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer, so no program is
necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication.

- There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link.
The side that issues commands is called master, and the side that receives the commands, executes
the process and sends back responses is called slave.

Note:
It is necessary to set the system register of the communicatio nport to the computer link for using this
function. Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP0R, however, the master function is
not available for the tool and USB ports.

MEWTOCOL master function

- This function is to carry out the communication on the master side (side that issues commands) of the
computer link. It is executed with the PLC's instruction F145(SEND) or F146(RECV). It is not necessary
to write the response process as a ladder, so the program is easier than the general-purpose
communication function.

The 1:1 or 1:N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function
and the MEWTOCOL-COM. [Our devices (e.g.)]: PLC, IPD, temperature control unit, message runner,
eco-power meter

MEWTOCOL slave function

- This function is to receive commands from the computer link, execute the process and send back the
results. Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function. (Set the communication
conditions in the system registers.) It enables the 1:1 or 1:N communication with a master computer or
PLC.
- The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC
operation.

7-6
7.4.2 MEWTOCOL Slave Function
Outline of operation

Command and response

- Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands.
- Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses. When the PLC receives a
command, it processes the command regardless of the sequence program, and sends a reponse back
to the computer. On the computer side, the execution result of the command can be confirmed by the
transmitted response.

MEWTOCOL-COM sketch
- Communication is carried out in a conversational format, based on the MEWTOCOL-COM
communication procedures.
- Data is sent in ASCII format.
- The computer has the first right of transmission.
- The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a
message is sent.

7-7
Format of command and response
Command message
All command-related items should be noted in the text segment. The unit number must be specified
before sending the command.

1. Header (Start code)

Commands must always have a "%" (ASCII code: H25) or a "<" (ASCII code: H3C) at the beginning of a
message.
2. Unit number
The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified. In 1:1
communication, the unit number "01" (ASCII code: H3031) should be specified. The unit number of the
PLC is specified by the system register.
3. Text
The content differs depending on the command. The content should be noted in all upper-case
characters, following the fixed formula for the particular command.

4. Check code
BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC should be created so that it
targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character.
The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR
operation, and replaces the final result with character text. It is normally part of the calculation program
and is created automatically.
The parity check can be skipped by entering "* *" (ASCII code: H2A2A) instead of the BCC.
5. Terminator (End code)
Messages must always end with a "CR" (ASCII code: H0D).

Note: When writing

- The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command.
- If there is a large number of characters to be written, they may be divided and sent as several
commands, if there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded, they may be divided
and several responses sent.

Key Point:
- With the FP0R, an expansion header "<" is supported to send single frame of up to 2048 characters as
well as general "%".
Type of header No. of characters that can be sent in 1 frame
％ Max. 118 characters
＜ Max. 2048 characters
7-8
Response message
The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer.

1. Header (Start code)

A "%" (ASCII code: H25) or a "<" (ASCII code: H3C) must be at the beginning of a message.
The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command.
2. Unit number
The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here.
3. Text
The content of this varies depending on the type of command. If the processing is not completed
successfully, an error code will be stored here, so that the content of the error can be checked.

4. Check code
BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC starts from the header and
checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with
character text.
5. Terminator (End code)
There is always a "CR" (ASCII code: H0D) at the end of the message.

Note: When reading

- If no response is returned, the communication format may not be correct, or the command may not
have arrived at the PLC, or the PLC may not be functioning.
Check to make sure all of the communication specifications (e.g. baud rate, data length, and parity)
match between the computer and the PLC.
- If the response contains an "!" instead of a "$", the command was not processed sucessfully. The
response will contain a communication error code. Check the meaning of the error code.
- Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response
(see below). This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear.

7-9
Commands to be used
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contancts.
(RCS) ･Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) ･Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) ･Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on or off.
(WCS) ･Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) ･Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) ･Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set
RS Reads the timer/counter setting value.
value area
Write timer/counter set
WS Writes the timer/counter setting value.
value area
Read timer/counter
RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
elapsed value area
Write timer/counter
WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
elapsed value area
Register or Reset
MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
contacts monitored
Register or Reset data
MD Registers the data to be monitored.
monitored
Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered contact or data using MD and MC.
Preset contact area (fill Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16-point on and off
SC
command) pattern.
Preset data area (fill Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified
SD
command) range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and
Read the status of PLC RT
error codes if an error occurs.

Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller.

Remote control RM
(RUN mode <=> PROG. mode)

Abort AB Aborts communication.

7-10
7.4.3 Setting Communication Parameters
Tool port/COM port (RS232C port)
The settings for baud rate and communication format are entered using a programming tool.

Note: When the MEWTOCOL master is used, also select "Computer Link". (COM port only)

Setting with FPWIN GR

Select "Options" in the menu bar, and then select "PLC Configuration". Click "Tool Port" or "COM Port"
from the left list.

Dialog box of PLC system register setting (Tool port selection screen)

No. 410 Unit number

The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99.

No. 412 Communication mode

Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode. Click "Computer Link".

No. 413 Communication Format setting

The default setting of communication format is as below.
Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port.
(The terminator and header cannot be changed.)
Char. Bit: 8 bits
Parity: Odd
Stop Bit: 1 bit
Terminator: Setting disable
Header: Setting disable

No. 415 Baud rate setting

The default setting for the baud rate is "9600 bps". Set the value to match the external device connected
to the communication port. Select one of the values from "2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and
115200 bps".

USB port
The setting for the USB port is fixed. The setting for the communication parameter is not available.

7-11
7.4.4 1:1 Communication (MEWTOCOL Slave Function)
Overview
For a 1:1 computer link between the FP0R and a computer, and RS232C cable is needed.
Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC.

System register settings

No. Name Set value
No.410 Unit No. 1
No.412 Communication mode Computer link
No.413 Communication format Char. bit: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: ….. None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bit
Terminator: …….. CR
Header: ………… No STX
No.415 Baud rate 2400 to 115200 bps
Note) The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected computer.
Programming of computer link
- For a computer link, a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and
response messages to be received on the computer side. No communication program is required on
the PLC side.
(Specify the communication format only by the system register.)
- The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC
operation.

Key Point:
- Using our software Control CommX enables the communication on Visual Basic.
- An add-in software "PCWAY" to be used with a spreadsheet software "Excel" is available to collect data.

Example of connection to the computer <1:1 communication>

Tool port

COM port (RS232C port)

7-12
Example of connection with an external device <Programmable display (1:1 communication with
GT-series RS232C type)>
Overview
For a 1:1 computer link between the FP0R and a programmable display, and RS232C cable is needed.
Communication is performed via commands from the programmable display and responses from the
PLC.
No program is required for communication. Simply set the mutual communication settings to operate the
PLC via the programmable display.

Tool port

COM port (RS232C port)

Note:
A USB cable cannot be used. Make the connection with the tool port or RS232C port.
Use a recommended cable for the tool port connection.

Reference: <GT series Technical Manual ARCT1F398E>

7-13
7.4.5 1:N Communication (MEWTOCOL Slave Function)
For a 1:N computer link, the computer and the FP0R are connected through a commercially available
RS232C-RS485 converter, and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable.
The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses: The computer sends a
command specifying the unit number, and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the
computer.

Note) Lineeye SI-35 is recommended to be used as a converter.

Setting of unit numbers

By default, the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings.
There is no need to change this for 1:1 communication, but if 1:N communication is used to connect
multiple PLCs to the transmission line (e.g. in a C-NET), the unit number must be specified so that the
destination of the command can be identified.
The unit number is specified by using the system register.

Setting system registers

No. Name Set Value
No. 410 Unit number 1 to 99 (Set the desired unit number)
(With a C-NET adapter, a maximum of 32 units
(stations) can be specified.)
No. 412 Communication mode Computer link
No. 413 Communication format Char. bit: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: ….. None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bit
Terminator: …….. CR
Header: ………… STX not exist
No. 415 Baud rate Note2) 2400 to 115200 bps
Note1) The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected computer.
Note2) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction.
However, the setting value of the system register cannot be changed.

7-14
7.4.6 MEWTOCOL Master
Use the F145 (SEND) "Data send" or F146 (RECV) "Data receive" instruction to use the MEWTOCOL
master function.

Communication port
The MEWTOCOL master is not available for the tool port. It is available for the COM port (RS232C port)
only.

Sample program

Reference: For information on the F145(SEND) and F146(RECV) instructions,

<Programming Manual ARCT1F353E>
7-15
Flowchart

With the above program, the procedures 1 to 3 are executed repeatedly.

1. Updates the write data if the write data (DT50 and DT51) and the read data (DT60 and DT61) are
matched.
2. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the
COM port (RS232C port).
3. Reads the DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the
COM port (RS232C port).

7-16
7.4.7 Setting in Compatiblity Mode with FP0 (FP0 Compatibility Mode)
Setting Communication Parameters
Confirm that the model of the programming tool is FP0.
Note) Only the salve function is available in the FP0 compatibility mode.
Usable communication ports on FP0R (FP0 compatibility mode)
Tool port
USB port （No communication parameter）
COM port (RS232C port)
Tool port settings
Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 410 Unit number

The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 32.
No. 411 Communication format
Modem connection: Connect/Not Connect
Char. bit: 8 bits/7 bits
- Change the value to match the connected external device.
No. 414 Baud rate setting
The baud rate of 9600 or 19200 bps can be selected. Specify the value to match the connected external
device.
COM port (RS232C port) settings

No. 412 Mode selection

Select the computer link.
No. 413 Communication Format
Char. Bit: 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
Terminator: CR
Header: STX not exist
- Change the value to match the connected external device.
No. 414 Baud rate
Select one of the values from "300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps".
No. 415 Unit number
The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 32.
No. 416 Modem enabled
Check the box to connect a modem.

7-17
7.5 Communication Function 2: General-purpose Serial
Communication

7.5.1 Overview
- In general-purpose serial communication, data is sent and received over the communication port to and
from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader.
- Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the communication port by means of
an FP0R program and the FP0R data registers.

Outline of operation
To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general-purpose serial communication
function, the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used. The F159
(MTRN) instruction and the "reception done" flag are used in these operations, to transfer data between
the PLC and an external device.
Sending data Receiving data
Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored Data received from the communication port is stored
in the data register used as the send buffer in the receive buffer specified in the system register,
(DT). When F159(MTRN) is executed, the data and the "reception done" flag goes on. Data can be
is output from the communicaton port. received whenever the "reception done" flag is off.

- The terminator specified in the system register - When data is being received, the "reception done"
is automatically added to the data that has flag is controlled by the F159(MTRN) instruction.
been sent. - No terminator is included in the stored data.
- The maximum volume of data that can be - The maximum volume of data that can be received
sent is 2048 bytes. is 4094 bytes.

Key Point: In the compatibility mode with the FP0 (FP0 compatibility mode),
the F159(MTRN) instruction is changed to the F144(TRNS) instruction.

7-18
7.5.2 Programming Example of General-purpose Serial Communication
The F159(MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified communication port.

F159 (MTRN) instruction

Data is sent and received via the specified COM port .

Devices that can be specified for S: Only data registers (DT) can be specified as the send buffer.
Devices that can be specified for n: WX, WY, WR, WL, SV, EV, DT, LD, I (I0 to ID), K, H
Devices that can be specified for D: Only the K constants (only K1)

Sending data
The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data
table, starting with the area specified by S, through the communication port specified by D. Data can be
sent with the header and terminator automatically attached. A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent.
When the above program is run, the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the
send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from the communication port.

Receiving data
Data can be received when the “reception done” flag is off. The received data is stored in the receive
buffe specified by the system register. When the reception of the data is completed (the terminator is
received), the “reception done” flag turns on, and subsequently, receiving data is prohibited. To receive
the next data, execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction and turn the “reception done” flag off to clear the
number of received bytes to 0. To receive data continuously without sending data, clear the number of
transmitted bytes to 0 (set “n” to “K0”), and then execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction.

Reference: <Programming Manual ARCT1F353E>

Binary communication
Selecting “STX not exist” for the header and “None” for the terminator in the general-purpose serial
communication enables the binary communication.
Sending data: Sends the data of bytes to be specified.
Receiving data: Check the No. of bytes received before the process. At that time, the reception done flag
does not work.

7-19
Data to be sent/received with FP0R
Remember the following when accessing data in the FP0R send and receive buffers:

- If a header has been chosen in the communication format settings, the code STX (H02) will
automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent.
- The data without the code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer, and the “reception done”
flag turns on when the terminator (end code) is received. When the terminator has been set to “None”,
the “reception done” flag does not work.
However, if the code STX is added in the middle of the data, the number of received byte is cleared to
0, and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again.
- A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent.
- There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer.

Sending data:
Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is.

Example:
The data “12345” is transmitted as an ASCII code to an external device.
1. Data sent using the F95 (ASC) instruction should be converted to ASCII code data.

2. If DT100 is being used as the send buffer, data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers
starting from the next register (DT101), in two-byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte.

Receiving data:
The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data.

Example:
The data “12345CR” is transmitted from a device with RS232C port.
If DT200 is being used as the receive buffer, received data will be stored in the registers starting from
DT201, in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte.

7-20
7.5.3 Sending Data
Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers.
Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer (DT), and when the F159 (MTRN)
instruction is executed, the data is output from the communication port.

Data table for transmission (send buffer)

Sample program for sending data

The following program transmits the characters “ABCDEFGH (Hex)” to an external device using the
communication port.

The program described above is executed in the following sequence.

1) “ABCDEFGH” is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register.
2) The data is sent from the communication port using the F159 (MTRN) instruction.

Explanatory diagram

7-21
Explanation of data table
The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S.

- Use an F0 (MV) or F95 (ASC) instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data
storage area specified in S.

Transmission process
When the execution condition of the F159 (MTRN) instruction turns on and the “transmission done” flag
R9039 is on, operation is as follows:
1. n is preset in S. The “reception done” flag R9038 is turned off, and the reception data number is
cleared to 0.
2. The set data is transmitted in order from the lower-order byte in S+1 of the table.
- During transmission, the “transmission done” flag R9039 turns off.
- If system register 413 is set to header (start code) with STX, the header is automatically added to the
beginning of the data.
- The terminator (end code) specified in system register 413 is automatically added to the end of the data.

3. When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted, the S value is cleared to 0 and the
“transmission done” flag R9039 turns on.

When you do not wish to add the terminator (end code) during transmissions:
- Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number.
- If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data, set system register 413 to “Terminator -
None”.
Programming example:
The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator.

Key Point:
- Do not include the terminator (end code) in the transmission data. The terminator is added
automatically.

7-22
- When “STX exist” is specified for the header (start code) in system register 413, do not add the header
to the transmission data. The header is added automatically.

7-23
7.5.4 Receiving Data
Data input from the communication port is
stored in the receive buffer specified by the
system register, and the “reception done” flag
goes on. If the “reception done” flag is off, data
can be received at any time.

Data table for reception (receive buffer)

This is the state when the above program is executed.
DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive buffer.
System register settings are as follows:
- System register 416: K200
- System register 417: K5

Sample program for receiving data

10-byte data received in the receive buffer through the communication port 1 are copied to DT0.

The program described above is executed in the following sequence.

1) The data sent from external devices is stored in the receive buffer.
2) The “reception done” contact R9038 is turned on.
3) The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DT0.
4) The F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed with no data to reset the buffer writing point and to turn off
the reception done” contact R9038. The system is now ready to receive the next data.
(The data in the receive buffer is not cleared.)

Note:
Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress (e.g., if the
“reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of different
statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you
should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.
Explanatory diagram

7-24
Explanation of data table
Data sent from an external device connected to the communication port is stored in the data registers
that have been set as the receive buffer.

- Specify the data registers in system register 416 to

419.
- The number of bytes of data received is stored in the
starting address of the receive buffer. The initial value
is 0.
- Received data is stored in the received data storage
area in order from the lower -order byte.

Reception process
When the “reception done” flag R9038 is off, operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an
external device. (The R9038 flag is off during the first scan after RUN).
1. Incoming data is stored in order from the lower-order byte of the 2nd-word area of the receive buffer.
Header and terminator (start and end codes) are not stored.

2. When the terminator (end code) is received, the “reception done” flag R9038 turns on. Reception of
any further data is prohibited. When the terminator has been set to “None”, the “reception done” flag
does not turn on. Check the number of received bytes to judge whehter the reception has completed
or not.
3. When an F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “reception done” flag R9038 turns off (except the
case when the terminator has been set to “None”), the number of received bytes is cleared, and
subsequent data is stored in order from the lower-order byte.

For repeated reception of data, perform the following steps:

1. Receive data
2. Reception done (R9038: on, reception prohibited)
3. Process received data
4. Execute F159 (MTRN) (R9038: off, reception possible)
5. Receive subsequent data

Prepare for reception

- The “reception done” flag R9038 turns on when data
reception from the external device is completed.
Reception of any further data is prohibited.
- To receive subsequent data, you must execute the F159
(MTRN) instruction to turn off the “reception done” flag
R9038.

7-25
7.5.5 Flag Operation in Serial Communication
Header: No-STX, Terminator: CR
Receiving data:
The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are
related as follows:

- For general-purpose serial communication, half-duplex transmission must be used.

- Reception is disabled when the “reception done” flag R9038 is on.
- When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write
pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address.
- Also, when F159 (MTRN) is executed, the error flag R9037, the “reception done” flag R9038 and the
“transmission done” flag R9039 goes off.
- Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag
R9039 must be observed.
- Reception stops if the error flag R9037 goes on. To resume reception, execute the F159 (MTRN)
instruction, which turns off the error flag.

Note:
Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress (e.g., if the
“reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of different
statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you
should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.

7-26
Header: STX, Terminator: ETX
Receiving data:
The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are
related as follows:

- The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order. When the header is received, the number of
bytes received is cleared, and the address (write pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial
address.
- Reception is disabled while the “reception done” flag R9038 is on.
- Also, When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write
pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address.
- If there are two headers, data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer.
- The “reception done” flag R9038 is turned off by the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Therefore, if F159
(MTRN) is executed at the same time the terminator is received, the “reception done” flag will not be
detected.

7-27
Sending data:
The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are
related as follows:

- Header (STX) and terminator (ETX) are automatically added to the data being transmitted. The data is
transmitted to an external device.
- When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “transmission done” flag R9039 goes off.
- Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag
R9039 must be observed.

7-28
7.5.6 Changing Communication Mode Using F159(MTRN) Instruction
An F159 (MTRN) instruction can be executed to change between general-purpose serial communication
mode and computer link mode. To do so, specify H8000 for n (the number of transmission bytes) and
execute the instruction.

Changing from “general-purpose” to “computer link”

Changing from “computer link” to “general-purpose”

R9032: The COM port mode flag turns on when general-purpose serial communication mode is selected.

Note:
When the power is turned on, the operating mode selected in system register 412 takes effect.
It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode.

7-29
7.5.7 Setting Communication Parameters
Tool port/COM port (RS232C port)
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using a programming
tool.

Setting with FPWIN GR

Select "Options" in the menu bar, and then select "PLC Configuration". Click "Tool Port" or "COM Port"
from the left list.

Dialog box of PLC system register setting (Tool port selection screen)

No. 410 Unit number

The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99.

No. 412 Communication mode

Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode. Click "General communication".

No. 413 Communication Format setting

The default setting of communication format is as below.
Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port.
(The terminator and header cannot be changed.)
Char. Bit: 8 bits
Parity: Odd
Stop Bit: 1 bit
Terminator: CR
Header: STX not exist

No. 415 Baud rate setting

The default setting for the baud rate is "9600 bps". Set the value to match the external device connected
to the communication port. Select one of the values from "2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and
115200 bps".

No. 416 Starting address for data received (For the tool port: No. 420)
No. 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received (For the tool port: No. 421)
For the general-purpose serial communication, setting "Receive buffer" is required.
To change this area, specify the starting address using system register No. 416 or 420 and the volume
(number of words) using No. 417or 421. The receive buffer layout is shown below. When setting for the
tool port and the COM port (RS232C port) both, do not specify the same buffer number.

7-30
7.5.8 Connection with 1:1 Communication (General-purpose Serial
Communication)

System register settings

No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode General-purpose serial communication
No. 413 Communication format Char. bit: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: ….. None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bits
Terminator: …….. CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Header: ………… STX not exist
No. 415 Baud rate Note1) 2400 to 115200 bps
No. 416 Starting address for receive buffer C10, 14, 16: DT0 to DT12314
Note2)
No. 420 C32, T32, F32: DT0 to DT32764
(Default setting: Tool port: DT4096,
COM(RS232C) port: DT0
No. 417 Receive buffer capacity Note1) 0 to 2048 words (Default setting: 2048 words)
No. 421
Note1) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction. However, the
setting value of the system register cannot be changed.
Note2) No. 416 and 417 is the COM(RS232C) port. No. 420 and 421 is the tool port.

1:1 communication with Micro-Imagechecker

Overview
The FP0R and Micro-Imagechecker A200/A100 are connected using an RS232C cable. The results of
the scan are stored in the data registers of the FP0R.

After the scan start code “%SCR” has been sent from the FP0R side, the scan result is returned from the
Micro-Imagechecker as the response.

7-31
Communication format settings for Micro-Imagechecker
To set the communication mode and communication format settings for the Micro-Imagechecker, select
“5: communication” under “5: ENVIRONMENT” on the main menu, and the set the following items.
No. Name Set Value
No. 51 Communication mode Normal mode
No. 52 Serial settings Baud rate: …………. 9600 bps
Char. bit: ………….. 8 bits
Stop bit: …………….. 1 bit
Parity : ………….…... None/Odd
Flow control: ……….. None
No. 53 Serial output settings Output digit: ………… 5 column
Invalid Digit: ………. Repl. 0
Read End: …..……… None
Process End: ………. None
Numerical calculation: Output
Judgment: …………. Output

Key Point:
- If “Del” is specified for the invalid processing parameter, zero suppression processing will be carried out
on the output data, and the output format will be changed. Always make sure “Repl. 0” is specified.
- When outputting data to an external device, numerical calculation is required, so “Output” should be
specified for the “Numerical calculation” parameter.
- With the above settings, the following data will be output from the Micro-Imagechecker.

Examples of connection

7-32
Procedure of communication
In the following example, the Micro-Imagechecker is connected to the communication port.

7-33
Sample program
In the following example, the Micro-Imagechecker is connected to the communication port.

Buffer statuses
The following shows the statuses of the send and receive buffers when the sample program is run.

7-34
7.5.9 1:N Communication (General-purpose Serial Communication)）
The FP0R and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable. Using the protocol that matches
the external units, the F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data.

System register settings

No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode General-purpose serial communication
No. 413 Communication format Char. bit: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: ….. None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bits
Terminator: …….. CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Header: ………… STX not exist
No. 415 Baud rate Note２) 2400 to 115200 bps
No. 416 Starting address for receive buffer C10, 14, 16: DT0 to DT12314
Note3)
No. 420 C32, T32, F32: DT0 to DT32764
(Default setting: Tool port: DT4096,
COM(RS232C) port: DT0
No. 417 Receive buffer capacity Note3) 0 to 2048 words
No. 421
Note1) The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices.
Note2) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction. However, the
setting value of the system register cannot be changed.
Note3) No. 416 and 417 is the COM(RS232C) port. No. 420 and 421 is the tool port.

7-35
7.5.10 Settings in Compatibility Mode with FP0 (FP0 Compatibility Mode)
Programming Example of General-purpose Serial Communicationin FP0 compability mode
The high-level instruction F144(TRNS) is used to send and receive data via the COM port (RS232C port).
(The F159(MTRN) instruction is used in the normal FP0R mode.)

Key Point: In the FP0 compatiblity mode, the F144(TRNS) instruction is used instead of
F159(MTRN) instruction.

F144(TRNS) instruction
Data is sent and received between the FP0R and an external device via the COM port (RS232C port).

Devices that can be specified for S: Only data registers (DT) can be specified as the send buffer.
Devices that can be specified for n: WX, WY, WR, WL, SV, EV, DT, LD, I (I0 to ID), K, H

Sending data
The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data
table, starting with the area specified by S, through the COM port specified by D. Data can be sent with
the header and terminator automatically attached. A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent. When the
above program is run, the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer
starting from DT100 are sent from the COM port.

Receiving data
Data can be received when the “reception done” flag is off. The received data is stored in the receive
buffe specified by the system register. When the reception of the data is completed (the terminator is
received), the “reception done” flag (R9038) turns on, and subsequently, receiving data is prohibited. To
receive the next data, execute the F144(TRNS) instruction and turn the “reception done” flag (R9038) off
to clear the number of received bytes to 0. To receive data continuously without sending data, clear the
number of transmitted bytes to 0 (set “n” to “K0”), and then execute the F144 (TRNS) instruction.

Reference: <Programming Manual ARCT1F353E>

7-36
Setting Communication Parameters
Confirm that the model of the programming tool is FP0.
Usable communication port
COM port (RS232C port)
COM port (RS232C port) settings
Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 412 Communication mode

Select "General communication".
No. 413 Communication Format setting
Char. Bit: 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
Terminator: End code: CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Header: STX not exist/STX
- Specify the value to match the connected external device.

No. 414 Baud rate setting

Select one of the values from "300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps".
No. 415 Unit number
The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99.
No. 417 Starting address for data received
No. 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received
For the general-purpose serial communication, setting "Receive buffer" is required.
To change this area, specify the starting address using system register No. 417 and the volume (number
of words) using No. 418. The receive buffer layout is shown below.

Starting address for data received C10,C14,C16: DT0 to DT32764

C32 : DT0 to DT6143
T32 : DT0 to DT16383
(Default setting: Tool port: DT4096 COM(RS232C) port:
DT0)
Buffer capacity setting for data received 0 to 2048 words (Default setting: 2048 words)

7-37
7.6 Communication Function 3: PC(PLC) link Function

7.6.1 Overview
The FP0R supports a link system which connects PC(PLC) link (max. 16 units) corresponding to
MEWNET-W0, using a twsited-pair cable.
- Data is shared between the PLCs connected with the PC(PLC) link, using exclusive internal relays "link
relays (L)" and data registers "link registers (LD)".

- Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same
network.
- Likewise, if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed, the values of the same link register
are changed in all PLCs on the same network.
- The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs
connected to the network, so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network, such
as target production values and type codes, can easily be implemented to coordinate the data, and the
data of all units are updated at the same time.

7-38
Operation of PLC link
Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same
network.
Likewise, if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed, the values of the same link register
are changed in all PLCs on the same network.

Communication port
It is available for the COM port (RS232C port) only.

7-39
7.6.2 Setting of Unit Numbers
By default, the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers.
In a PC(PLC) link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line, the unit number must be
set in order to identify the different PLCs.

The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register.

Note1) The priority order for unit number settings is as follows:

1. SYS1 instruction
2. System registers
Note2) Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks
between them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer.
Note3) If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest
unit number in system register no. 47.

Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network. The same number
must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network.

Note:
When using the PC(PLC) link with the RS232C, the number of units is 2.

7-40
7.6.3 Setting Communication Parameters: PC(PLC) Link
Settings for baud rate and communication format
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM(RS232C) port are entered using a
programming tool.

Setting with FPWIN GR

Select "Options" in the menu bar, and then select "PLC Configuration". Click the "COM Port" tab.

Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 410 Unit number

The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 16.

No. 412 Communication Mode

Select the communication mode for the RS232C port.
Click on , and select “PC Link”.

Key Point:
When using a PC(PLC) link, the communication format and baud rate are fixed:

No. Name Set Value

No. 413 Communication format Char. bit: …… 8 bits
Parity: ….. Odd
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit
Terminator: …….. CR
Header: ………… STX not exist
No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps

7-41
7.6.4 Link Area Allocation
The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC(PLC) link are allocated in the link area of the CPU
unit. Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit.

System registers
Default
No. Name Set value
value
40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words
41 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words
42 Starting number for link relay transmission 0 0 to 63
For 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
PC 44 Starting number for link data register tranmission 0 0 to 127
(PLC) 45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words
link 0 46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half
Reverse: 2nd half
Note)
47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 16 1 to 16
PC(PLC) link
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half
Reverse: 2nd half
50 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words
For 51 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words
PC 52 Starting number for link relay transmission 64 64 to 127
(PLC) 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
link 1 54 Starting number for link data register tranmission 128 128 to 255
55 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words
Note)
57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 16 1 to 16
PC(PLC) link
Note) The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC(PLC)
link.

Link area configuration

- Link areas consist of link relays and link registers, and are divided into areas for PC(PLC) link 0 and
PC(PLC) link 1 and used with those units.
- The link relay which can ben used in an area for either PC(PLC) link 0 or PC(PLC) link 1 is maximum
1024 points (64 words), and the link register is maximum 128 words.

Note:
The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit
(MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same
values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).

Reference:
For the information on FP2-MCU, <Chapter 5 Communication Function PC(PLC) Link in FP2 Multi
Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E>.

7-42
Example of allocation
The areas for PC(PLC) link are divided into send areas and receive areas. The link relays and link
registers are sent from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC. Link relays and link registers
with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving
side.

For PC(PLC) link 0

Link relay allocation

System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64
42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 40 0
43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0
Note) No. 40 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units.

Link register allocation

System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
41 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128
44 Starting No. for link register transmission 0 40 80 0
45 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0
Note) No. 41 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units.

When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No. 1 send area can be sent to the No. 2, No. 3 and
No. 4 receive areas. Also, the No. 1 receive area can receive data from the No. 2 and No. 3 send areas.
No. 4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3, but cannot
transmit it to other stations.

7-43
For PC(PLC) link 1
Link relay allocation

System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
50 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64
52 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 64 84 104 64
53 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0
Note) No. 50 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units.

Link register allocation

System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
51 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128
54 Starting No. for link register transmission 128 128 208 128
55 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0
Note) No. 51 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units.

When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No. 1 send area can be sent to the No. 2, No. 3 and
No. 4 receive areas. Also, the No. 1 receive area can receive data from the No. 2 and No. 3 send areas.
No. 4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3, but cannot
transmit it to other stations.

Note:
The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit
(MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same
values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).

Reference:
For the information on FP2-MCU, <Chapter 5 Communication Function PC(PLC) Link in FP2 Multi
Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E>.

7-44
Partial use of link areas
In the link areas available for PC(PLC) link, link relays with a total of 1024 points (64 words) and link
registers with a total of 128 words can be used. This does not mean, however, that it is necessary to
reserve the entire area. Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays
and internal registers.

Link relay allocation

No. Name No.
No. 40 Range of link relays used 50
No. 42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 20
No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20

With the above settings, the 14 words (224 points) consisting of

WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays.

Link register allocation

No. Name No.
No. 41 Range of link registers used 100
No. 44 Starting No. for link register transmission 40
No. 45 Link register transmission size 40

With the above settings, the 28 words consisting of LD100 to

LD127 can be used as internal registers.

7-45
 Note: Precautions When Allocating Link Areas
If a mistake is made when allocating a link area, be aware that an error will result, and communication
will be disalbed.

Avoid overlapping send areas

When sending data from a send area to the receive area of another PLC, there must be a link relay and
link register with the same number in the receive area on the receiving side. In the example shown below,
there is an area between No. 2 and No. 3 which is overlapped, and this will cause an error, so that
communication cannot be carried out.

Example of link relay allocations

System registers
Set value of various control units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
No. 40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64
No. 42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 30
No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 34

Invalid allocations
The allocations shown below are not possible, neither for link relays nor for link registers:

- Send area is split

- Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments

7-46
7.6.5 Setting the Largest Unit Number for PC(PLC) Link
The largest unit number can be set using system register no. 47 (using system register no. 57 for
PC(PLC) link 1).

[Sample setting]
No. of units linked Setting contents
2 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set
2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set
A largest unit no. of 2 is set for each.
4 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set
2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set
3rd unit: Unit no. 3 is set
4th unit: Unit no. 4 is set
A largest unit no. of 4 is set for each.
n Nth unit: Unit no. n is set
A largest unit no. of n is set for each.

Note:
- Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks between
them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer.
- If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit
number in system register no. 47 (in system register no. 57 for PC(PLC) link 1).
- For all PLCs which are linked, the same value should be set for the largest unit number.
- If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set (default=16), or the
largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive, or the unit number
settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on, the
response time for the PC(PLC) link (the link transmission cycle) will be longer.

Reference: <7.6.7 PC(PLC) Link Response Time>

Setting PC(PLC) link switching flag

PC(PLC) link switching flag can be set using system register no. 46.
If it is set to 0 (default value), the first half of the link relays and registers are used. If it is set to 1, the
second half of the loink relays and registers are used.

7-47
7.6.6 Monitoring
When using a PC(PLC) link, the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays.

Transmission assurance relays

For PC(PLC) link 0: R9060 to R906F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16)
For PC(PLC) link 1: R9080 to R908F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16)
If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs, check to make sure the
transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data.

Operation mode relays

For PC(PLC) link 0: R9070 to R907F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16)
For PC(PLC) link 1: R9090 to R909F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16)
The operation modes (RUN/PROG.) can be checked for any given PLC.

PLC link transmission error relay R9050 (link 1)

This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission.

Key Point: Monitoring the PC(PLC) link status

Using a programming tool, the PC(PLC) link status items, such as the transmission cycle time and the
number of times that errors have occurred, can be monitored.

Using FPWIN GR: Select [Status Display] under [Online] in the menu. Click the [PC link] button after the
[Status Display] screen is shown.

Using FPWIN Pro: Select [PLC Link Status] under [Online] in the menu.

Note: Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible from the programming tool.

7-48
7.6.7 PC(PLC) Link Response Time
The maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle can be calculated using the following
formula.

The various items in the formula are calculated as described below.

Ts (transmission time per station)

Ts = scan time + Tpc (PC(PLC) link sending time)

Tpc = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Pcm (PLC link sending size)
Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps
Pcm = 23 + (number of relay words + number of register words) x 4

Tlt (link table sending time)

Tlt = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Ltm (link table sending size)

Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps

Ltm = 13 + 2 x n (n = number of stations being added)

Tso (master station scan time)

This should be confirmed using the programming tool.

Tlk (link addition processing time) …. If no stations are being added, Tlk = 0.
Tlk = Tlc (link addition command sending time) + Twt (addition waiting time) + Tls (sending time for
command to stop transmission if link error occurs) + Tso (master station scan time)

Tlc = 10 x Ttx (sending time per byte)

Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps
Twt = Initial value 400 ms (can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction)
Tls = 7 x Ttx (sending time per byte)
Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115. 2 kbps
Tso = Master station scan time

Calculation example 1
When all stations have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms
Each Ts = 1 + 6.82 = 7.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 7.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 1 = 130.44 ms

Calculation example 2
When all stations have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will
be:
T max. = 11.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 5 = 198.44 ms
7-49
Calculation example 3
When all but one station have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16,
relays and registers have been allocated evenly, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms
Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 15) ≒ 4.13 ms
Tlk = 0.96 + 400 + 0.67 + 5 ≒407 ms
Note: The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms.

Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 11.82 x 15 + 4.13 + 5 + 407 = 593.43 ms

Calculation example 4
When all stations have been added to an 8-unit link, the largest station number is 8, relays and
register have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (8 + 16) x 4 = 119 bytes
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 119 ≒ 11.43 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 11.43 = 16.43 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 8) ≒ 2.79 ms

Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 16.43 x 8 + 2.79 + 5 = 139.23 ms

Calculation example 5
When all stations have been added to a 2-unit link, the largest station number is 2, relays and
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (32 + 64) x 4 = 407 bytes
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 407 ≒ 39.072 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 39.072 = 44.072 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 2) ≒ 1.632 ms

Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 44.072 x 2 + 1.632 + 5 = 94.776 ms

Calculation example 6
When all stations have been added to a 2-unit link, the largest station number is 2, 32 relays and
2 register words have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (1 + 1) x 4 = 31 bytes
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 31 ≒ 2.976 ms
Each Ts = 1 + 2.976 = 3.976 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 2) ≒ 1.632 ms

Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 3.976 x 2 + 1.632 + 1 = 10.584 ms

Note:
- In the description, “stations that have been added” refers to stations which are connected between
station no. 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on.
- Comparing examples 2 and 3, the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not
been added to the link. As a result the PC(PLC) link response time is longer.
- The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize thte transmission cycle time even if there are one or
more stations that have not been added to the link.

7-50
Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added
If there are stations that have not been added to the link, the Tlk time (link addition processing time) and
with this the transmission cycle time will be longer.

With the SYS1 instruction, the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced. Thus,
SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time.

<Programming example of SYS1 instruction>

(SYS1, M PCLK1T0, 100)

Function: Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC(PLC) link from the
default value of 400 ms to 100 ms.
Keywords:Setting for key word no. 1: PCLK1T0
Permissible range for key word no. 2: 10 to 400 (10 ms to 400 ms)
Note) Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right.
If the second keyword is 2 digits, put 2 spaces, and if it is 3 digits, put one space.

Note:
If there are any unitss that have not been added to the link, the setting should not be changed as
long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem.
- The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The
same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs.
- The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs
connected to the link.
- If a short waiting time has been set, there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their
power supply is on. (The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms.)

7-51
Error detection time for transmission assurance relays
The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off, it takes (as a default value) 6.4 seconds for the
transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations. This time period can be
shortened using the SYS1 instruction.

<Programming example of SYS1 instruction>

(SYS1, M PCLK1T1, 100)

Function: Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC(PLC) link transmission assurance is off from the
default value of 6400 ms to 100 ms.
Keywords: Setting for key word no. 1: PCLK1T1
Permissible range for key word no. 2: 100 to 6400 (100 ms to 6400 ms)
Note) Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right.
If the second keyword is 3 digits, put 2 spaces, and if it is 4 digits, no space is needed.

Note:
- The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time
does not cause any problems.
- The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The
same time should be set for all linked PLCs.
- The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the
PLCs are connected to the link.
- If short time has been set, the transmission assurance relay may not function properly. (The shortest
time that can be set is 100 ms.)

7-52
7.7 Communication Function 4: MODBUS RTU
Communication

7.7.1 Overview of Functions

- The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP0R and other devices
(including our FP-X, FP-e, Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit).
- Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave
units and the slave units respond (response messages) according to the instructions.
- Enabels the communication between the devices of max. 99 units as the master function and slave
function is equipped.

About MODBUS RTU

- The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave
units communicating between them.
- There are ASCII mode and RTU (binary) mode in the MODBUS protocol, however, the FP0R is
supported with the RTU (binary) mode only.

Master function
Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV)
instructions.
Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible.

Slave function
If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit, they send back the response
message corresponding to the content.
Do not execute the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions when the unti is used as a slave unit.

7-53
MODBUS RTU command message frame
START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END
3.5-character time 8 bits 8 bits n*8 bits 16 bits 3.5-character time

ADDRESS (Unit No.) 8 bits, 0 to 99 (decimal)

Note1) 0= Broadcast address
Note2) Slave unit No. is 1 to 99 (decimal)
Note3) For MODBUS, 0 to 247 (decimal)
FUNCTION 8 bits
DATA Varies depending on commands.
CRC 16 bits
END 3.5-character time (Differs depending on baud rate. Refer to reception
judgement time.)

Response in normal status

The same message as a command is returned for single write command.
A part of a command message (6 bytes from the beginning) is returned for multiple write command.

Response in abnormal status

In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command (except transmission error)

Slave address (unit number)

Function code + 80H
One of either 1, 2 or 3
Error code
CRC

Error code contents

1: Function code error
2: Device number error (out of range)
3: Device quantity error (out of range)

Reception done judgment time

The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned
below has passed after the final data was received.

Baud rate Reception done judgment time

2400 Approx. 13.3 ms
4800 Approx. 6.7 ms
9600 Approx. 3.3 ms
19200 Approx. 1.7 ms
38400 Approx. 0.8 ms
57600 Approx. 0.6 ms
115200 Approx. 0.3 ms

Note) The reception done judgment time is an approx. 32-bit time.

7-54
Supported commands
Executable
Code Name (MODBUS Remarks
instructions for Name for FP0R
(decimal) original) (Reference No.)
master
F146 (RECV) 01 Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils 0X
F146 (RECV) 02 Read Input Status Read X Input 1X
F146 (RECV) 03 Read Holding Registers Read DT 4X
F146 (RECV) 04 Read Input Registers Read WL and LD 3X
F145 (SEND) 05 Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 0X
F145 (SEND) 06 Preset Single Register Write DT 1 Word 4X
Cannot be issued 08 Diagnostics Loopback Test
F145 (SEND) 15 Force Multiple Coils Write Multiple Ys 0X
and Rs
F145 (SEND) 16 Preset Multiple Registers Write DT Multiple 4X
Words
Cannot be issued 22 Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask 4X
Cannot be issued 23 Read/Write 4X Registers Read/Write DT 4X

Table for MODBUS reference No. and FP0R device No.

Data on BUS
MODBUS reference No. FP0R device No.
(hexadecimal)
000001-001760 0000-06DF Y0-Y109F
Coil
002049-006144 0800-17FF R0-R255F
Input 100001-101760 0000-06DF X0-X109F
Holding C10, C14, C16 400001-412316 0000-301B DT0-DT12315
register C32, T32, F32 400001-432765 0000-7FFC DT0-DT32765
300001-300128 0000-007F WL0-WL127
Input register
302001-302256 07D0-08CF LD0-LD255

7-55
7.7.2 Setting Communication Parameters
Settings for baud rate and communication format
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM(RS232C) port are entered using a
programming tool.

Setting with FPWIN GR

Select "Options" in the menu bar, and then select "PLC Configuration". Click the "COM Port" tab.

Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 410 Unit number

The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99.

No. 412 Communication mode

Select the communication mode for the COM(RS232C) port.
Click on , and select “MODBUS RTU link”.

No. 413 Communication Format setting

The default setting of communication format is as below.
Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port.
(The terminator and header cannot be changed.)
Char. Bit: 8 bits
Parity: Odd
Stop Bit: 1 bit
Terminator: Setting disable
Header: Setting disable

No. 415 Baud rate setting

The default setting for the baud rate is "9600 bps". Set the value to match the external device connected
to the communication port. Select one of the values from "2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and
115200 bps".

For the details on the MODBUS RTU communication function, refer to the exclusive
specifications manual.

Reference: <MODBUS RTU Specifications>

It can be downloaded from our website.
http://panasonic-electric-works.net/ac

For information on F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV) instructions

Reference: <Programming Manual ARCT1F353E>

7-56
7.7.3 MODBUS Master
Use the F145 (SEND) “Data send” or F146 (RECV) “Data receive” instruction to use the MODBUS
master function.

Sample program

Reference: For the information on the F145(SEND) and F146(RECV) instructions,

<Programming Manual ARCT1F313E>

7-57
Flow chart

The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly.

1. Updates the write data if the write data (DT50 and DT51) and the read data (DT60 and DT61) are
matched.
2. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the
COM (RS232C) port.
3. Reads the data DT0 and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from
the COM (RS232C) port.

7-58
Chapter 8
High-speed counter, Pulse Output and
PWM Output functions
8.1 Overview of Each Functions

8.1.1 Three Pulse Input/Output Functions

There are three functions available when using the high-speed counter built into the FP0R.

High-speed counter function

The high-speed counter function counts external
inputs such as those from sensors or encoders.
When the count reaches the target value, this
function turns on/off the desired output.

Pulse output function

Combined with a commercially available motor
driver, the function enables positioning control.
With the exclusive instruction, you can perform
trapezoidal control, home return, and JOG
operation.

PWM output function

By using the exclusive instruction, the PWM output
function enables a pulse output of the desired duty
ratio.

8-2
8.1.2 Performance of Built-in High-speed Counter
Number of Channel
• There are six channels for the built-in high-speed counter
• The channel number allocated for the high-speed counter will change depending on the function being
used.

Counting range
• K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K+2, 147, 483, 647 (Coded 32-bit binary)
• The built-in high-speed counter is a ring counter. Consequently, if the counted value exceeds the
maximum value, it returns to the minimum value. Similarly, if the counted value drops below the
minimum value, it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there.

Note:
When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used, the value for the target value or the amount of
travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below.
-8,388,608 to +8,388,607 (Coded 24-bit binary)

8-3
8.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items

8.2.1 Specifications
High-speed counter function
Input/output
Performance
contact No. being Memory area being used
specifications
used
High-speed counter
Input contact
channel No. Mini-mum Maximum
number (value in Control Elapsed Target
input pulse counting
parenthesis is flag value area value area Note2)
Note1) width speed
reset input)
DT90300 DT90302
X0
CH0 R9110 to to
(X2)
DT90301 DT90303
DT90304 DT90306
X1
CH1 R9111 to to
(X2)
DT90305 DT90307
DT90308 DT90310
X3
CH2 R9112 to to
[Single phase] (X5)
DT90309 DT90311 5CH:
Incremental, 10µs
DT90312 DT90314 50 kHz
Decremental X4
CH3 R9113 to to
(X5)
DT90313 DT90315
DT90316 DT90318
CH4 X6
Note3) R9114 to to
(None)
DT90317 DT90319
DT90320 DT90322
CH5 X7
Note3) R9115 to to
(None)
DT90321 DT90323
X0 DT90300 DT90302
CH0 X1 R9110 to to
1CH:
[2-phase] (X2) DT90301 DT90303
15kHz
2-phase input X3 DT90308 DT90310
2CH:
One input, CH2 X4 R9112 to to 25µs
15kHz
Direction (X5) DT90309 DT90311
3CH:
distinction X6 DT90316 DT90318
CH4 10kHz
Note3) X7 R9114 to to
(None) DT90317 DT90319
Related instructions:
F0(MV) :High-speed counter control
F1(DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F165(CAM0): CAM control
F166(HC1S) :Target value match on
F167(HC1R) :Target value match off
F178(PLSM): Input pulse measurement
Note1) Reset input X2 can be set to either CH0 or CH1. Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3.

Note2) Reference: For information on minimum input pulse width,

see <8.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width>.
Note3) It is not available for C10 type.
Note4) The maximum counting speed is the values when execuing the conditions of each item (counting
method or number of channels) only.
They are the values when not executing the HSC match on/off instruction and other pulse I/O
process simultaneously, or not execuitng an interrupt program.

8-4
Pulse output function
Input/output contact number used
High-speed counter Deviation
CW or pulse CCW or Near home
channel No. counter Home input Note2)
output pulse output input
clear output
Y6 or Y8
CH0 Y0 Y1 Note3) X4
Y7 or Y9
Independence CH1 Y2 Y3 Note3) X5
CH2 Y4 Y5 None or YA X6
CH3 Y6 Y7 None or YB X7 DT90052
Y6 or Y8 <bit4>
X axis Y0 Y1 Note3) X4
CH0
Linear Y7 or Y9
Y axis Y2 Y3 Note3) X5
Interpolation
X axis Y4 Y5 None or YA X6
CH1
Y axis Y6 Y7 None or YB X7
Memory area used
Position
High-speed counter channel Pulse output Elapsed Target area
control Target value
No. instruction value for match
starting area
flag area on/off
input
DT90400 to DT90402 to DT90404 to
CH0 X0 R9120
DT90401 DT90403 DT90405
DT90410 to DT90412 to DT90414 to
CH1 X1 R9121
DT90411 DT90413 DT90415
Independence
DT90420 to DT90422 to DT90424 to
CH2 X2 R9122
DT90421 DT90423 DT90425
DT90430 to DT90432 to DT90434 to
CH3 X3 R9123
DT90431 DT90433 DT90435
DT90400 to DT90402 to DT90404 to
X axis R9120
DT90401 DT90403 DT90405
CH0
DT90410 to DT90412 to DT90414 to
Y axis R9121
Linear DT90411 DT90413 DT90415
-
Interpolation DT90420 to DT90422 to DT90424 to
X axis R9122
DT90421 DT90423 DT90425
CH1
DT90430 to DT90432 to DT90434 to
Y axis R9123
DT90431 DT90433 DT90435
Max. output frequency
-No change of speed, 4CH: 50 kHz
-Using linear interpolation: 2H: 50 kHz
Related instructions
F0 (MV) :high-speed counter control
F1 (DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F166(HC1S) :Target value match on
F167(HC1R) :Target value match off
F171 (SPDH) :trapezoidal control/JOG positioning
F172 (PLSH) :JOG operation
F174 (SP0H) :Data table control
F175 (SPSH) :Linear interpolation control
F177 (HOME) :Home return
Note1) The pulse output function is only available with the transistor output type.

Note2) Reference: For DT90052, see <8.4.4 Pulse Output Control Instruction (F0) (F1)>.
Note3) For C16 type, Y6(CH0) and Y7(CH1). For C32 type, Y8(CH0) and Y9(CH1).
Note4) The maximum frequencies are the values when execuing the conditions of each item (output
method or number of channels) only.
They are the values when not executing the change of speed or match on/off instruction and
other pulse I/O process simultaneously, or not execuitng an interrupt program.

8-5
PWM output function
High-speed Output Pulse output
Output frequency
counter contact No. instruction Related instructions
(duty)
channel No. used flag
CH0 Y0 R9120
Frequency: 6 Hz to 4.8 kHz F0(MV) (High-speed counter
CH1 Y2 R9121
0.0% to 99.9% control)
CH2 Y4 R9122
(Resolution: 1000) F173(PWMH) (PWM output)
CH3 Y6 R9123
Note) The PWM output function is only available with the transistor output type.

8-6
Memo

8-7
8.2.2 Functions Used and Restrictions
Simplified chart - Maximum counting speed of High-speed counter
The maximum counting speed of the high-speed counter varies according to No. of channels to be used
or the simultaneous use of the pulse output function. Use the chart below as a guide.
Max. counting speed
(Frequency kHz)
Combination with pulse output function
(Trapezoidal control, No change in speed
50kHz)

Combination of high-speed counter No pulse output Pulse output 1 CH

Single-phase 2-phase Single- Single-
2-phase 2-phase
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH0 CH2 CH4 phase phase
A 50 50
A A 50 50
A A A 50 50
- - -
A A A A 50 50
A A A A A 50 40
A A A A A A 50 40
A 15 14
- A A - 15 - 10
A A A 10 10
A A 50 15 50 14
A A A 50 15 50 14
A A A A 50 15 50 14
A A A A A 50 15 50 14
A A A 50 15 50 10
A A A A 50 15 50 10
A A 50 15 50 12
A A A 50 13 50 12
A A A A 50 12 50 11
A A A A A 50 12 50 9
A A A 50 13 50 10
A A A A 50 12 50 10
Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned values when the
change of pulse output speed, CAM control instruction, target value match ON/OFF
instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously.

8-8
 Max. counting speed
(Frequency kHz)
Combination with pulse output function
(Trapezoidal control, No change in speed 50kHz)

Pulse output 2 CH Pulse output 3 CH Pulse output 4 CH

Single- Single- Single-
2-phase 2-phase 2-phase
phase phase phase
50 50 30
50 35 25
50 30 20
- - -
40 30 20
35 29 20
30 24 15
10 10 10
- 9 - 8 - 8
9 8 8
50 10 44 10 30 10
50 10 40 10 28 10
44 10 30 10 25 10
35 10 25 10 20 10
50 9 35 8 28 8
40 9 30 8 25 8
50 10 50 10 40 8
50 10 45 8 35 7
50 9 40 8 30 7
50 8 35 8 30 7
50 10 50 8 40 8
50 9 45 8 35 7
Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned
values when the change of pulse output speed, CAM control instruction,
target value match ON/OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are
executed simultaneously.

8-9
FP0R pulse output performance
Independent control
Single-phase
Maximum output frequency kHz
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3
Available 50
Available Available 50
Available Available Available 50
Available Available Available Available 50
Note) Even if all channels are used, they can be used within the ranges above.

Interpolation control
Linear interpolation Maximum output frequency kHz
CH0 CH2 (Composite speed)
Available 50
Available Available 50
Note) Even if all channels are used for the interpolation function, they can be used within the ranges
above.

Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned values when the change
of pulse output speed, CAM control instruction, target value match ON/OFF instruction and other
interrupt programs are executed simultaneously.

8-10
8.3 High-speed Counter Function

8.3.1 Overview of High-speed Counter Function

• The high-speed counter function counts the input signals, and when the count reaches the target value,
turns on and off the desired output.
• To turn on an output when the target value is matched, use the target value match ON instruction F166
(HC1S). To turn off an output, use the target value match OFF instruction F167 (HC1R).
• Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET/RET instruction.

Setting the system register

In order to use the high-speed counter function, it is necessary to set system register numbers nos. 400
and 401.

8.3.2 Input Modes and Count

Incremental input mode Decremental input mode

Two-phase input mode Incremental/decremental input mode

Direction discrimination

8-11
Count for reset input
(Incremental input mode)

The reset input is executed by the interruption at (1) on (edge)

and (2) off (edge).
(1) on (edge) … Count disable, Elapsed value clear
(2) off (edge) … Count enable
DT90052 (bit2): “able/disable” setting of the input can be set
by the reset input.

8.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width

For the period T (1/frequency), a minimum input pulse width of T/2 (single-phase input) or T/4 (two-
phase input) is required.

<Single phase> <Two-phase>

8-12
8.3.4 I/O Allocation
• As shown in the table in the previous section “8.2.1”, the inputs and outputs used will differ depending
on the channel number being used.
• The output turned on and off can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 (HC1S)
and F167 (HC1R).
When using CH0 with incremental input and When using CH0 with two-phase input and
reset input reset input

* The output turned on and off when the target * The output turned on and off when the target
value is reached can be specified from Y0 to Y7 value is reached can be specified from Y0 to Y7
as desired. as desired.

Reference: <8.2.1 Table of Specifications>

8.3.5 Instructions used with High-speed Counter Function

High-speed counter control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable.
• Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052.
• Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again.

Operations that can be performed with this instruction

• Counter software reset (bit0)
• Counting operation enable/disable (bit1)
• Hardware reset enable/disable (bit2)
• Clear high-speed counter instructions F166 to F167
• Clear target value match interrupt

Example: Performing a software reset

In case of CH0
In the above program, the reset is performed in step
(1) and 0 is entered just after that in step (2). The
count is now ready for operation. If it is only reset,
counting will not be performed.

In case of CH1

8-13
High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP0R

• The area DT90052 for writing channels

and control codes is allocated as shown in
the left figure.
• Control codes written with an F0 (MV)
instruction are stored by channel in
special data registers DT90370 to
DT90375.

Note) In the reset input setting, the reset

input (X2 or X5) allocated in the high-speed
counter setting of the system registers are
defined to “enable/disable”.

High-speed counter control flag monitor area

Channel No. Control code flag monitor area
CH0 DT90370
CH1 DT90371
CH2 DT90372
CH3 DT90373
CH4 DT90374
CH5 DT90375

8-14
Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1)
• This instruction writes or reads the elapsed value of the high-speed counter.
• Specify this instruction together with the elapsed value area of high-speed counter after the special
data register DT90300.
• If the F1 (DMV) instruction is executed specifying DT90300, the elapsed value will be stored as 32-bit
data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301.
• Use this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.

Example 1: Writing the elapsed value

Set the initial value of K3000 in the high-speed
counter.

Example 2: Reading the elapsed value

Read the elapsed value of the high-speed
counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101.

Target value match ON instruction (F166)

Example 1:
If the elapsed value (DT90300 and DT90301)
for channel 0 matches K10000, output Y7 turns
on.

Example 2:
If the elapsed value (DT90308 and DT90309)
for channel 2 matches K20000, output Y6 turns
on.

Target value match OFF instruction (F167)

Example 1:
If the elapsed value (DT90304 and DT90305)
for channel 1 matches K30000, output Y4 turns
off.

Example 2:
If the elapsed value (DT90312 and DT90313)
for channel 3 matches K40000, output Y5 turns
off.

Input pulse measurement instruction (F178)

Note) The last numbers of the actual measured values may vary due to the measurement error.

8-15
8.3.6 Sample program
Positioning operations with a single speed inverter

Wiring example

Operation chart I/O allocation

I/O No. Description
X0 Encoder input
X5 Operation start signal
Y0 Inverter operation signal
R100 Positioning operation running
R101 Positioning operation start
R102 Positioning done pulse
R9110 High-speed counter CH0 control flag

Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90300
and DT90301) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.

8-16
Positioning operations with a double speed inverter

Wiring example

Operation chart I/O allocation

I/O No. Description
X0 Encoder input
X5 Operation start signal
Y0 Inverter operation signal
Y1 Inverter high-speed signal
R100 Positioning operation running
R101 Positioning operation start
R102 Arrival at deceleration point
R103 Positioning done pulse
R900C Comparison instruction <flag>
R9110 High-speed counter CH0 control flag

8-17
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value
(DT90300 and DT90301) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating. When the
elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.

8-18
8.4 Pulse Output Function

8.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function

Instructions used and controls
Together with a commercially available pulse-string input type motor driver, the pulse output function can
be used for positioning control.
Exclusive
Type of control instru- Description
ction
Provides trapezoidal (table-shaped) control for automatically
Trapezoidal control F171 obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed, target
speed, acceleration time, deceleration time and target value.
Outputs the specified pulses and performs the deceleration
JOG positioning F171 stop according to the position control starting input during the
pulse output (JOG operation).
Causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition
JOG operation F172 is on. The change in the target speed while pulses being
output or deceleration stop can be performed.
Enables positioning control in accordance with the specified
Data table control F174
data table.
Enables the linear interpolation control, by specifying the
Linear interpolation F175 composite speed, acceleration time, deceleration time, X-axis
target value and Y-axis target value.
Home return F177 Enables automatic home return operation.

Note:
The pulse output function can be used with the transistor output type only.

Setting the system register

When using the pulse output function, set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401
to “Do not use high-speed counter”.

8-19
8.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes
Clockwise/counter-clockwise output method
Control is carried out using two
pulses: a forward rotation pulse and a
reverse rotation pulse.

Pulse/direction output method (forward: OFF/reverse: ON)

Control is carried out using one pulse
output to specify the speed and
another to specify the direction of
rotation with on/off signals. In this
mode, forward rotation is carried out
when the rotation direction signal is
OFF.

Pulse/direction output method (forward: ON/reverse: OFF)

Control is carried out using one pulse
output to specify the speed and
another to specify the direction of
rotation with on/off signals. In this
mode, forward rotation is carried out
when the rotation direction signals is
ON.

8-20
Operation mode
Incremental <Relative value control>
Outputs the pulses set with the target value.
Selected
Pulse and direction Pulse and direction
Mode HSC counting
CW/CCW forward OFF/ forward ON/
Target Method
reverse ON reverse OFF
value
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Positive direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
OFF ON
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Negative direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by
executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be 6000.

Absolute <Absolute value control>

Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value.
Selected
Pulse and direction Pulse and direction
Mode HSC counting
CW/CCW forward OFF/ forward ON/
Target method
reverse ON reverse OFF
value
Target value Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
greater than direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
current value OFF ON
Target value Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
less than direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
current value ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW
by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be
1000.

Home return
• When executing the F177 (HOME) instruction, the pulse is continuously output until the home input (X4,
X5, X6 or X7) is enabled.
• To decelerate the movement when near the home position, designate a near home input and set bit 4
of special data register DT90052 to off → on → off.
• The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed.

JOG operation
• Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 (PLSH) instruction is in the ON
state. The change in the target speed while pulses being output or deceleration stop can be performed.
• The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 (PLSH) instruction.

8-21
8.4.3 I/O Allocation
Double pulse input driver
(CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method)
• Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for “CW, CCW”.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used.
• Set the control code for F171 (SPDH) instruction to “CW/CCW”.
<When using CH0> <When using CH2>

* X0 or any other input can be specified for the * X1 or any other input can be specified for the
near home input. near home input.

Single pulse input driver

(pulse input and directional switching input method)
• One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal, direction output terminal, and home input is determined by
the channel used.
• Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the <bit4> of
special data register DT90052.
• Up to four driver systems can be connected.
<When using CH0> <When using CH2>

* X0 or any other input can be specified for the * X1 or any other input can be specified for the
near home input. near home input.

Reference: <8.2.1 Table of Specifications>

8-22
8.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)
Pulse output control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for resetting the built-in high-speed counter, stopping the pulse output, and
setting and resetting the near home input.
• Specify this F0 (MV) instruction together with special data register DT90052.
• Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again.

Example 1:
Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration.
In case of CH0

In these programs, the near home input is

enabled in step (1) and 0 is entered just after
In case of CH2 that in step (2) to perform the preset operations.

Example 2:
Performing a forced stop of the pulse output.
In case of CH0

The output counting value of the elapsed value

area may be different from the input counting
value of the motor side if the forced stop is
executed by these programs.
In case of CH2

8-23
 Key Point: : pulse output control flag area of FP0R
• The area DT90052 for writing channels and
control codes is allocated as shown in the left
figure.
• Control codes written with an F0 (MV)
instruction are stored by channel in special
data register DT90380 to DT90383.
Note) The output counting value of the elapsed
value area may be different from the input
counting value of the motor side if the pulse
output is stopped by the “Continue/stop of pulse
output”. After the pulse output stops, execute
the home return.

Pulse output control flag monitor area

Channel No. Control code monitor area
CH0 DT90380
CH1 DT90381
CH2 DT90382
CH3 DT90383

Reference: <8.2.1 Table of specifications> for information on the special data register.

Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1)

• This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the pulse output control.
• Specify this F1 (DMV) instruction together with the pulse output elapsed value area after the special
data register DT90400.
• If the F1 (DMV) instruction is executed specifying DT90400, the elapsed value will be stored as 32-bit
data in the combined area of special data registers DT90400 and DT90401.
• Use only this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.

Example 1:
Writing the elapsed value
Set the initial value of K3000 for the pulse
output CH0.

Reading the elapsed value

Reads the elapsed value of the pulse output
CH0 to DT100 and DT101.

8-24
Wiring example

Note) When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a resister of 2 kΩ (1/2 W) to
R1, and connect a resistor of 2 kΩ (1/2 W) − 470 Ω (2 W) to R2.

Table of I/O allocation

I/O No. Description I/O No. Description
X2 Home sensor input XD Overrunning signal
X0 Near home sensor input Y0 Pulse output CW
X8 Positioning start signal (+) Y1 Pulse output CCW
X9 Positioning start signal (-) R10 Positioning in progress
XA Home return start signal R11 Positioning operation start
XB JOG start signal (+) R12 Positioning done pulse
XC JOG start signal (-) R9110 Pulse output instruction flag for CH0

8-25
8.4.5 Positioning Control Instruction F171 - Trapezoidal Control
This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table while the
execution condition is on. The target speed can be changed during the trapezoidal control. (The total
number of pulses to be output will not change.)
Also, it is possible to perform the deceleration stop duirng the control.
There are two kinds of control methoda, which are type 0 and type 1. When using the type 0, the speed
can be changed regarding the initially specified target speed as the maximum value. When using the
type 1, the speed can be changed in a range up to the maximum frequency.

Pulses are output from Y0 at an initial speed of

1000 Hz, a target speed of 7000 Hz, an acceleration
time of 450 ms, a deceleration time of 300 ms and a
movement amount of 100,000 pulses.

Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed.

1. When the initial speed is 1 or higher, and lower than 46Hz, the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can be
performed. If the frequency is higher than that, the speed error will be larger.
2. When the initial speed is 46 or higher, and lower than 184Hz, the control up to 50kHz can be performed.
3. When the initial speed is 184 or higher, the control up to 50kHz can be performed. The speed error around 50kHz will be smallest.
Change of speed during pulse output
1. With the type 0, if a value larger than the target speed at start-up is specified, it will be corrected to the target speed at start-up.
With the type 1, if the target value is set to a value larger than 50kHz, it will be corrected to 50kHz.
2. If the elapsed value crosses over the acceleration forbidden area starting position during accelerating, acceleration cannot be
performed. For information on the acceleration forbidden area starting position, refer to the special registers.
3. For deceleration, the speed cannot be lower than the deceleration minimum speed. For information on the deceleration minimum
speed, refer to the special registers.
Explanation of pulse output operation
Pulses are output using a duty of 25% fixedly.
When outputting with the PULSE+SIGN method, pulses will be output approx. 300µs later after the output of direction signal. (The
characteristics of a motor driver is considered.)

8-26
Operaiton mode of trapezoidal control
There are two operation modes for the FP0R trapezoidal control, which are type 0 and type 1. Those
operation specifications vary when the target speed is changed during the trapezoidal control. For
changing the target speed, the execution condition (trigger) should be on during the trapezoidal control.
Also, it is possible for the both types to perform the deceleration stop control.

Type 0
The speed can be changed regarding the initially specified target speed as the maximum value during
the trapezoidal control. (In the example below, the maixmum is 7 kHz.)
Data table
Trapezoidal control
Control code
Incremental CW/CCW
Initial speed 1000 Hz
Target speed 7000 Hz → 5000 Hz
Acceleration time 450 ms
Deceleration time 300 ms
Target value 100,000 pulses

Type 1
The speed can be changed in the range up to the maximum frequency (50 kHz) during the trapezoidal
control.
Data table
Trapezoidal control
Control code
Incremental CW/CCW
Initial speed 1000 Hz
Target speed 25000 Hz → 50000 Hz
Acceleration time 600 ms
Deceleration 400 ms
time
Target value 100,000 pulses

8-27
Deceleration stop
When the deceleration stop is requested during the trapezoidal control, deceleration will be performed
with the slope specified for the deceleration time from the target speed.
Use the bit 5 of DT90052 for requesting the deceleration stop.
Data table
Trapezoidal control
Control code
Incremental CW/CCW
Initial speed 1000 Hz
Target speed 7000 Hz
Acceleration time 450 ms
Deceleration time 300 ms
Target value 100,000 pulses

8-28
8.4.6 JOG Positioning Type 0 (F171) Instruction
This instruction performs the deceleration stop outputting the specified number of pulses when the
position control starting input is input externally or the position control start is requested internally during
the pulse output. It is possible to change the target speed while the operation is running.
Pulses are output from Y0 at an initial
speed of 1000 Hz, a target speed of 7000
Hz, an acceleration time of 300 ms, a
deceleration time of 450 ms and a
movement amount of 100,000 pulses.
During the pulse output, the number of
pulses specified for the target value will be
output from the time that the position
control start is requested, and the
deceleration stop will be performed.
When this program ie executed, the
positioning table and the pulse output
diagram will be as shown below.

Positioning data table

JOG positioning type 0
DT0 Control code *1
Incremental CW/CCW
DT2 Initial speed *2 1000 Hz
DT4 Target speed *2 7000 Hz
DT6 Acceleration time *3 300 ms
DT8 Deceleration time *3 400 ms
DT10 Target value *4 100,000 pulses

Note the following characteristics according to the

specified initial speed.
1. When the initial speed is 1 or higher, and lower than
46Hz, the control up to the maximum frequency to the
degree of 10kHz can be performed. If the frequency is
higher than that, the speed error will be larger.
2. When the initial speed is 46 or higher, and lower than
184Hz, the control up to 50kHz can be performed.
3. When the initial speed is 184 or higher, the control up to
50kHz can be performed. The speed error around 50kHz will
be smallest.
Change of speed during pulse output
1. If the target value is set to a value larger than 50kHz, it
will be corrected to 50kHz.
2. If the elapsed value crosses over the acceleration
forbidden area starting position during accelerating,
acceleration cannot be performed. For information on the
acceleration forbidden area starting position, refer to the
special registers.
3. For deceleration, the speed cannot be lower than the
deceleration minimum speed. For information on the
deceleration minimum speed, refer to the special registers.
Explanation of pulse output operation
Pulses are output using a duty of 25% fixedly.
When outputting with the PULSE+SIGN method, pulses will
be output approx. 300µs later after the output of direction
signal. (The characteristics of a motor driver is considered.)

8-29
Pulse output diagram (when the target speed is not changed)

Pulse output diagram (when the target speed is changed)

8-30
8.4.7 JOG Positioning Type 1 (F171) Instruction
This instruction performs the deceleration stop outputting the specified number of pulses with the target
speed being changed when the position control starting input is input externally or the position control
start is requested internally during the pulse output. Two target speeds can be specified.
Pulses are output from Y0 at an initial speed
of 1000 Hz, a target speed of 7000 Hz, and
an acceleration time of 300 ms.
During the pulse output, the number of
pulses specified for the target value will be
output with the speed being changed to the
target speed 2 from the time that the position
control start is requested, and the
deceleration stop will be performed.
When this program ie executed, the
positioning table and the pulse output
diagram will be as shown below.

Positioning data table

JOG positioning type 1
DT0 Control code *1
Incremental CW/CCW
DT2 Initial speed *2 1000 Hz
DT4 Target speed 1 *2 7000 Hz
DT6 Acceleration time *3 300 ms
DT8 Target speed 2 *2 10000 Hz
DT10 Change time *3 150 ms
DT12 Deceleration time *3 450 ms
DT14 Target value *4 100,000 pulses

Note the following characteristics according to the

specified initial speed.
1. When the initial speed is 1 or higher, and lower than
46Hz, the control up to the maximum frequency to the
degree of 10kHz can be performed. If the frequency is
higher than that, the speed error will be larger.
2. When the initial speed is 46 or higher, and lower than
184Hz, the control up to 50kHz can be performed.
3. When the initial speed is 184 or higher, the control up to
50kHz can be performed. The speed error around 50kHz will
be smallest.
Explanation of pulse output operation
Pulses are output using a duty of 25% fixedly.
When outputting with the PULSE+SIGN method, pulses will
be output approx. 300µs later after the output of direction
signal. (The characteristics of a motor driver is considered.)

8-31
Pulse output diagram

8-32
8.4.8 JOG Operation (F172) Instruction
This instruction is used to output pulses of the specified parameter from the specified channel while the
trigger (execution condition) is on. It is possible to change the target speed during the pulse output or
perform the deceleration stop.
There are two kinds of control method, which are type 0 and type 1. Using the type 0 disable the setting
of the target value, and using the type 1 enables the setting. When using the type 1, even if the trigger
(execution condition) is on, the deceleration stop will be performed according to the target value.
When the trigger (R1) is on, pulses are output from Y0 at an
initial speed of 1000 Hz, a target speed of 7000 Hz and an
acceleration time of 300 ms.
If the trigger (R1) is off, the deceleration stop will be
performed with a deceleration time of 450 ms. However, if
the trigger is turned on again, it will accelerate to the target
speed again.

When this program ie executed, the positioning table and the

pulse output diagram will be as shown below.

Positioning data table

JOG operation type 0
DT0 Control code *1
Forward CW/CCW
DT2 Initial speed *2 1000 Hz
DT4 Target speed *2 7000 Hz
DT6 Acceleration time *3 300 ms
DT8 Deceleration time *3 450 ms
DT10 Target value *4 0 pulse

Note the following characteristics according to the

specified initial speed.
1. When the initial speed is 1 or higher, and lower than
46Hz, the control up to the maximum frequency to the
degree of 10kHz can be performed. If the frequency is
higher than that, the speed error will be larger.
2. When the initial speed is 46 or higher, and lower than
184Hz, the control up to 50kHz can be performed.
3. When the initial speed is 184 or higher, the control up to
50kHz can be performed. The speed error around 50kHz will
be smallest.
Change of speed during pulse output
1. If the target value is set to a value larger than 50kHz, it
will be corrected to 50kHz.
2. If the elapsed value crosses over the acceleration
forbidden area starting position during accelerating,
acceleration cannot be performed. For information on the
acceleration forbidden area starting position, refer to the
special registers.
3. For deceleration, the speed cannot be lower than the
deceleration minimum speed. For information on the
deceleration minimum speed, refer to the special registers.
Explanation of pulse output operation
Pulses are output using a duty of 25% fixedly.
When outputting with the PULSE+SIGN method, pulses will
be output approx. 300µs later after the output of direction
signal. (The characteristics of a motor driver is considered.)

8-33
Pulse output diagram

Operation mode of JOG operation

There are two operation modes for the FP0R JOG operation, which are type 0 and type 1. Those
operation specifications for the specified target value vary.

Type 0
Regardless of the settings for the target value, the JOG operation is performed when the trigger is on.

Type 1
Even if the trigger is on, the deceleration stop is performed according to the settings of the target value.

8-34
8.4.9 Arbitrary Data Table Control (F174) Instruction
Pulses are output from the specified cahnnel according to the specified data table.
When the trigger (R10) is on, pulses at a
frequency of 1000 Hz are output from Y0,
and positioning will start.

Positioning is performed sequentially

according to the values of data tables, and
stops at the data table that the value of pulse
output stop (K0) is written.

When this program is executed, the

positioning table and the pulse output
diagram will be as shown below.

Positioning data table

Arbitrary table control
DT100 Control code *1
Incremental CW/CCW
DT102 Frequency 1 *2 1000 Hz
DT104 Target value 1 *3 1000 pulses
DT106 Frequency 2 2500 Hz
DT108 Target value 2 3000 pulses
DT110 Frequency 3 5000 Hz
DT112 Target value 3 5000 pulses
DT114 Frequency 4 1000 Hz
DT116 Target value 4 2000 pulses
DT118 Assignment of pulse output stop *4 K0

Note: If the target value is set to a value larger than

50kHz, it will be corrected to 50kHz.

Note the following characteristics according to the

specified initial speed.
1. When the initial speed is 1 or higher, and lower than
46Hz, the control up to the maximum frequency to the
degree of 10kHz can be performed. If the frequency "n" is
set to a value below 6Hz, it will be corrected to 6Hz.
2. When the initial speed is 46 or higher, and lower than
184Hz, the control up to 50kHz can be performed. If the
frequency "n" is set to a value below 46Hz, it will be
corrected to 46Hz.
3. When the initial speed is 184 or higher, the control up to
50kHz can be performed. If the frequency "n" is set to a
value below 184Hz, it will be corrected to 184Hz.
Explanation of pulse output operation
Pulses are output using a duty of 25% fixedly.
When outputting with the PULSE+SIGN method, pulses will
be output approx. 300µs later after the output of direction
signal. (The characteristics of a motor driver is considered.)

8-35
Pulse output diagram (when the target speed is not changed)

8-36
8.4.10 Home Return (F177) Instruction
This instruction performs home return according to the specified data table. The elapsed value area is
cleared to zero after the completion of home return.
There are two kinds of control method, which are type 0 and type 1.
With the type 0, the home input is effective regardless of it is performed before the near home input,
during deceleration after the input or after the completion of deceleration.
With the type 1, the home input is effective only after deleceleration (started by near home input) has
been completed.
Pulses are output at an initial speed of 200 Hz, a target
speed of 2000 Hz, and an acceleration time of 300 ms
when the trigger (R11) is on.

When this program is executed, the positioning table and

the pulse output diagram will be as shown below.

Positioning data table

Home return type 0
DT100 Control code *1
Forward CW/CCW
DT102 Initial speed *2 500 Hz
DT104 Target speed *2 10000 Hz
DT106 Acceleration time *3 300 ms
DT108 Deceleration time *3 450 ms
DT110 Creep speed *2 2 kHz
DT112 Deviation counter clear signal output time *4 None

Note the following characteristics according to the

specified initial speed.
1. When the initial speed is 1 or higher, and lower than
46Hz, the control up to the maximum frequency to the
degree of 10kHz can be performed. If the frequency is
higher than that, the speed error will be larger.
2. When the initial speed is 46 or higher, and lower than
184Hz, the control up to 50kHz can be performed.
3. When the initial speed is 184 or higher, the control up to
50kHz can be performed. The speed error around 50kHz will
be smallest.
Explanation of pulse output operation
Pulses are output using a duty of 25% fixedly.
When outputting with the PULSE+SIGN method, pulses will
be output approx. 300µs later after the output of direction
signal. (The characteristics of a motor driver is considered.)

8-37
Pulse output diagram

Home return operation modes

There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP0R: Type 0 and Type 1.

Type0
The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input, whether deceleration
is taking place, or whether deceleration has been completed.

Type 1
In this mode, the home input is effective only after deceleration (started by near home input) has been
completed.

8-38
8.4.11 Linear Interpolation (F175) Instruction
Precautions when programming
Special
The uses of the relays in the
internal relay Operations of relays
program
number
R9120 (CH0) Turns on during execution of pulse output
Use this to prohibit the simultaneous
R9121 (CH1) instructions that include a linear
execution of other high-speed counter
R9122 (CH2) interpolation instruction and then maintains
instructions and pulse output
R9123 (CH3) that state during pulse output from CH0 to
instructions, and to verify completion
Pulse output CH3. This flag is the same for instructions
of an action.
control flag F166 to F176.

Note:
- The above flags vary during scanning.
Example: If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions, there may be the
different states in the same scan. Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a
measure.

Flag operation when the instruction is executed

8-39
Linear interpolation (F175) instruction
The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table.

Pulses are output from the X axis (CH0) and the Y axis
(CH1), so that the composite speed is an initial speed of
500 Hz, the maximum speed of 5000 Hz, and the
acceleration/deceleration time of 300 ms. The two axes
are controlled so that a linear path is followed to the
target position.

When this program is executed, the positioning table and

the pulse output diagram will be as shown below.

Positioning data table

Linear interpolation
DT100 Control code *1
Incremental CW/CCW
DT102 Composite speed: Initial speed *2 500 Hz
DT104 Composite speed: Target speed 5000 Hz
DT106 Acceleration time *3 300 ms
DT108 Deceleration time 300 ms
DT110 X-axis target value *4 5000 pulses
DT112 Y-axis target value 2000 pulses
DT114 X-axis component speed: Initial speed *5 (Calculation result will be stored.)
DT116 X-axis component speed: Target speed *5 (Calculation result will be stored.)
DT118 Y-axis component speed: Initial speed (Calculation result will be stored.)
DT220 Y-axis component speed: Target speed (Calculation result will be stored.)

Positioning path

8-40
Component speed and correction
Note the following characteristics according to the component speed (initial speed) calculated using the above formula *5.
1. When the initial speed is 1 or higher, and lower than 46Hz, the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can
be performed. If the frequency is higher than that, the speed error will be larger.
2. When the initial speed is 46 or higher, and lower than 184Hz, the control up to 50kHz can be performed.
3. When the initial speed is 184 or higher, the control up to 50kHz can be performed. The speed error around 50kHz will be
smallest.
Also, the intial speed may be corrected due to the calculation result.
Note that the vector of the composite speed may be deviated at the time the pulse output starts or stops when the value has been
corrected.
Compare with the correction speed of initial speed in the special registers to check whether or not the specified initial speed is
corrected.
Explanation of pulse output operation
Pulses are output using a duty of 25% fixedly.
When outputting with the PULSE+SIGN method, pulses will be output approx. 300µs later after the output of direction signal. (The
characteristics of a motor driver is considered.)

8-41
Sample program for interpolation control
Wiring diagram

Note) If the input of the stepping motor is 5V photocoupler type, connect a resistor of 2kΩ(1/2 W) to R1,
and connect a resistor of 2kΩ(1/2 W) − 470Ω(2 W) to R2.

8-42
Home return operation (Minus direction)
When XA turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0 and CCW
output Y3 of the specified channel CH1, and the return to home begins.
In CH0, when X0 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X4 turns on, home return is completed. After
the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90400 and DT90401 are cleared to 0.
In CH1, when X3 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X5 turns on, home return is completed. After
the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90410 and DT90411 are cleared to 0.
When the operations in both CHs is completed, the return to home completes.

8-43
Program (Home return operation)

Key Point:
As there is no interpolation function for the home return, the home return should be executed for each
channel. After the home return for both channels is completed, the positioning operation running
program (R40) turns off.
Pulse output diagram

8-44
8.5 PWM Output Function

8.5.1 Overview
PWM output function
With the F173 (PWMH) instruction, the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is
obtained.

System register setting

When using the PWM output function, set the channel CH0 and CH3 with system registers 400 and 401
to “High-speed counter not used”.

8.5.2 PWM Output Instruction F173

While X6 is on, a pulse with a period of 1 ms and duty
ratio of 50% is output from Y0 of specified channel
CH0.
When the program runs, the data table will be as
shown below.

Data table
DT100 Control code *1 : K13
DT101 Duty *2 : 50%
*1: Specify the control code by setting the K constant.

K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms)

K3 6 166.67
K4 7.5 133.33
K5 12.5 80.00
K6 25 40.00
K7 50 20.00
K8 100 10.00
K9 200 5.00
K10 400 2.50
K11 600 1.67
K12 800 1.25
K13 1.0 k 1.00
K14 1.2 k 0.83
K15 1.6 k 0.63
K16 2.0 k 0.50
K17 3.0 k 0.33
K18 4.8 k 0.21
*2: Specify the duty by setting the K constant.

Note:
• If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed,
a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output. If written when instruction execution is started,
an operation error is occurred.

8-45
8-46
Chapter 9
Security Functions
9.1 Type of Security Functions
There are mainly Three functions as the security function of the FP0R.
It is possible to rewrite data during any of these functions is being used.

1: Password protect function

It is used to restrict access to the programs in the FP0R from the programming tool by setting a
password. Writing and reading ladder programs or system registers will be unperformable by
setting a password and setting to the protect mode.
There are two types of passwords as below.

• 4-digit password: 4 characters of 16 characters that are “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” can be used.
• 8-digit password: A maximum of 8 English one byte characters (case-sensitive) and symbols
can be used.

2: Upload protection
Ladder programs or system registers cannot be uploaded from the FP0R by setting that the
program is not uploaded. As transferring programs to the master memory cassette as well as the
programming tool will be unperformable, it ensures higher security.

Password protection and upload protection functions

They are available for the FP memory loader Ver 2.0 or later.

Reference: <9.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader>

The state of the security can be checked with programming tools.

- Using FPWIN GR
1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at
the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2. Select “Security information” or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar.

The following displays will be shown.

Security information dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box

9-2
9-3
9.2 Password Protect Function
This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a
password on the FP0R.
There are two ways to set a password as below.
1. Sets using the programming tool.
2. Sets using an instruction (SYS1 instruction).

Note: Precautions on the password setting

Do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you cannot read
programs. (Even if you ask us for your password, we cannot crack it.)

9-4
9.2.1 Password Setting
Setting using FPWIN GR
1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at
the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2. Select or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown.

Security information dialog box

Indicates the current status of the password
setting.
Specify the type of the password to be used.
Specify an operation mode.
Access: Accesses programs by inputting a
password.
Protect: Sets a password.
Unprotect: Releases the password setting.
Input a password.
Those are the settins when using the FP
memory loader (Ver 2.0 or later).

Confirmation the contents of the password setting

Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box.

Current status
Indicates the current status of the password setting. There are following five statuses.

1. Password is not set : Password is not set.

2. 4 digits Protect : Four-digit password, and access is prohibited.
3. 4 digits Available to access : Four-digit password, and access is allowed.
(The status that inputting the password completes and that can access
programs.)
4. 8 digits Protect : Eight-digit password, and access is prohibited.
5. 8 digits Available to access : Eight-digit password, and access is allowed.
(The status that inputting the password completes and that can access
programs.)

Available retry counts

This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession (up to 3 times). Every
time incorrect password is input, the number will decrease.
If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession, you cannot access the
program.
Turn the power supply of the FP0R off and then on again to try to input the password again.

Note:
If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off with the setting that the access is allowed, the setting will
be that the PLC is protected again.

9-5
Setting to prohibit the access with a password
As the dialog box is shown, select as below.

Digit number:
Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”.

Operation Mode:
Select “Protect”.

4 digits (or 8 digits) password:

Input a password to be set.

Click “Settings”.

Input the password for confirmation again, and

click [OK].

The setting has completed.

Setting to allow the access with a password

As the dialog box is shown, select as below.

Digit number:
Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”.

Operation Mode:
Select “Access”.

4 digits (or 8 digits) password:

Input a password to be set.

Click “Settings”.

The setting has completed.

Note:
If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off with the setting that the access is allowed, the setting will
be that the PLC is protected again.

9-6
How to cancel the password setting
Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting.
Description Program
Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified. All programs are retained.
All programs are deleted.
Erases all programs and security information to
Force cancel (The upload protection setting is
cancel the setting forcibly.
also deleted.)

Releaseing the protect of PLC (Programs are retained.)

As the dialog box is shown, select as below.

Digit number:
Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”.

Operation Mode:
Select “Unprotect”.

4 digits (or 8 digits) password:

Input a password to be set.

Click “Settings”.

Click [OK].

Note) The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed.

9-7
Executing the force cancel (Programs and security information are all deleted.)
Click [Force cancel].

Click [Yes].

If the current status is “Password is not set”,

this procedure has completed.
All programs and security information were
deleted.

9-8
9.3 Upload Protection
This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program
uploading.
If the upload protection is set, note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disalbed to be
uploaded after that.
However, editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming
tool. Note that the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched.
When using this function, store ladder programs as files without fail.

Unperformable operations on the FP0R set to prohibit uploading programs

1. Uploading ladder programs and system registers to PCs
2. Transferring programs to the memory loader
The setting for this function can be cancelled using the programming tool, however, all ladder programs,
system registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled.

Note: When cancelling this setting forcibly:

All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection
setting is cancelled.
We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us.
We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading.

Keeping your programs is your responsibility.

Interaction with the password protect function

The password setting can be specified for the FP0R that this function is set at the same time.
Also, this function can be specified for the FP0R that a password is set.

9.3.1 Upload Protection Setting

Following two methods are available to set the upload protection.

1. Set in the control unit using the programming tool.

Setting using FPWIN GR

1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at
the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2. Select or “Upload settings” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown.

Select “Set that PLC cannot be uploaded”.

Click “Execute”.

9-9
9.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader
The following two functions of the FP memory loader (AFP8670/AFP8671) (*) can be set through the
FP0R.
* Available for the FP memory loader Ver. 2.0 or later.
Limited distribution function
(Programs can be downloaded only to the units which the same password has been set.)
When downloading a program from the memory loader, the program can be downloaded only when the
program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled.

Upload protection setting function

If this function is valid, the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the
PLC from the FP memory loader.

9-10
Precautions when downloading
When downloading a program to the FP0R from the FP memory loader, the password thta has been
already set on the unit may be changed. Note the followings.

Status of FP memory loader Password setting for FP0R after download

No password setting The password will be cleared.
4-digit password setting The password will be overwritten with a new 4-digit password.
8-digit password setting
The password will be overwritten with a new 8-digit password.
Limited distribution setting: Off
8-digit password setting The password will not change.
Limited distribution setting: On (The program itself will not be downloaded.)

9.4.1 Setting with FPWIN GR

1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at
the samte time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2. Select "Set PLC Password" under "Tool" on the menu bar.

1. Select "8 digits" for "Digit number".

2. Check the functions to be used of "Options

for FP memory loader".

- Limited distribution function

→ ”Allow the download in case of same
password”

- Enable the upload protection setting.

→ ”Set that PLC cannot be uploaded”

3. After setting the above check box, input a

8-digit password, and then click "Setting".
The setting has completed.

* This function is available only when a 8-digit

password has been set.

9-11
9.5 Table of Security Settings/Cancel
For the settings on the FP0R control unit
Status of security
Security not Upload 4-digit 8-digit
set protection password password
Upload protection A A A
Sets/
4-digit password A A N/A
Cancels
8-digit password A A N/A
A: Available N/A: Not available

9-12
9-13
Chapter 10
Other Functions
10.1 P13 (ICWT) Instruction
Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built-in ROM (F-ROM data area)
control unit using the P13 (ICWT) instruction.

Note the followings for the use:

1. Restrictions on the number of writing

Writing can be performed within 10000 times. If writing continues for more than that, the correct
operation cannot be guaranteed.

2.The power supply turns off when the P13 (ICWT) instruction is being executed.
If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed, the hold type area may not be kept.
(Also, when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode, the same event may occur.)

10-2
10.2 Sampling Trance Function

10.2.1 Overview
The sampling trace function is available in the FP0R mode. Using this function enables to take
samplings and record (accumulate) the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits + 3 data registered in the PLC at
an arbitrary timing, and to examine the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampling at
an arbitrary timing.

The sampling trace function is used in the time chart monitor function under the online menu of the
FPWIN GR.

The instructions, functions, special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace
function are as below.
F155 (SMPL) sampling instruction
F156 (STRG) sampling stop trigger instruction
Time chart moitor of FPWIN GR

R902C :Sample point flag OFF = Sampling by instruction

ON = Sampling at regular time intervals
R902D :Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts = 0 stops = 1
R902E :Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on.
R902F :Sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts.
DT90028 :Interval of sampling trace k0 = For sampling by instruction
k1 to k3000 (10 ms to 30 seconds) For sampling at regular time intervals

10.2.2 Details of Sampling Trace Function

No. of data collectable at one sampling: 16 bits + 3 data
Sampling capacity (No. of samples accumulable): 300 samples (C10, C14, C16)
1000 samples (C32, T32, F32)
Types of sampling timing (When an instruction is executed, or at regular time intervals)
1: Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms
2: Sampling by F155 (SMPL) instruction

Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction.

Also, more than one sampling can be executed in one scan.
Timing for the execution of the F155 (SMPL) instruction can be set by the ladder sequence.

Note:
It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the F155 (SMPL)
instruction simultaneously.

How to stop sampling

Methods of the stop trigger (request): Following two methods are available.

1: Deactivate request by the tool software

2: Deactivate request by the F156 (STRG) instruction

If the stop trigger activates, the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified number of delay,
and then stop the sampling operation.
Once the sampling operation stops, the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will
be indicated in a time chart.
It is possible to adjust whether to see before or after the trigger point by the setting of the number of
delay.

10-3
Operation image of sampling trace

10.2.3 How to Use Sampling Trace

1. Sampling at regular time intervals

1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR.
2) Specify the sampling configurations.
Set the mode of the sampling configurations to "TRACE".
Set the sampling rate (time).

10-4
3) Start monitoring. Start with the button.

2. Sampling by instruction
1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR.
2) Specify the sampling configurations.
Set the mode of the sampling configurations to " TRACE ".
Set the sampling rate (time) to 0.

3. Read data by trigger

1) Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2
on the time chart display of FPWIN GR. The data will be indicated in the time chart.
Stop monitoring. (Stop wih the button, stop by the "Trigger Break" in the menu, or stop by the F156
instruction.)

Reference: <FPWIN GR Help>

10-5
10.3 Time Constant Processing
The input time constants for 32 points of the CPU inptu X0 to X1F can be set by the system registers
430 to 437.
If this setting is specified, an operation like the equivalent circuit below will be performed.
By the setting, the noises or chatterings of input will be removed.

CXn = Input signal of Xn contact

Xn = Image memory of input Xn

Note:
- The input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal I/O update.
- If the partial update instruction is executed for the input in the time constant processing, the time
constant processing will be invalid, and the input status at the time will be read out and set.
- The time constant processing can be performed for the input other than X0 to X1F (add-on cassettes or
expansion units) by the F182 (FILTR) instruction.
- The timer instruction is not used for the timer processing in this equivalent circuit.
- The time constant processing is invalid when the high-speed counter, pulse catch or interrupt has been
specified.
- Only following settings are valid: C10: X0 to X5, C14/C16: X0 to X7, C32/T32/F32: X0 to XF

10-6
Chapter 11
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting
11.1 Self-Diagnostic function

11.1.1 LED Display for Status Condition

How to read status indicator LEDs on control unit
LED status
Operation
ERROR/ Description
RUN PROG. statuss
ALARM
Light (on) Off Off Normal operation Operation
Normal
Off Light (on) Off PROG. mode Stop
condition
Flashes Flashes Off Forcing input/output in Run mode Operation
Self-diagnostic error (Operation is
Light (on) Off Flashes Operation
running.)
Abnormal
Off Light (on) Flashes Self-diagnostic error (Operation stops.) Stop
condition
Light (on) Light (on) Light System watchdog timer has been
Stop
or off or off (on) activated

• The control unit has a self-diagnostic function which

identifies errors and stops operation if necessary.
• When an error occurs, the status of the status indicator
LEDs on the control unit vary, as shown in the table above.

11.1.2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs

• Normally, when an error occurs, the operation stops.
• When the duplicated output error or operation error occurs, the user may select whether operation is to
be continued or stopped by setting the system registers. You can set the error which operation is to be
continued or stopped using the programming toolshoftware as shown below.

“PLC System Register” setting menue on programming tool software

To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs, select “PLC System Register
setting” under “Option” on the menu bar, and click on the “Action on Error” tab. The screen shown below
is displayed.

Example1: When allowing duplicated output

Turn off the check box for No. 20. When operation is resumed, it will not be handled as an error.

Example2: When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred

Turn off the check box for No. 26. When operation is resumed, it will be continued, but will be handled as
an error.
11-2
11.2 Troubleshooting

11.2.1 If ERROR/ALARM LED is Flashing

Condition: The self-diagnostic error occurs
Procedure 1
Check the error contents (error code) using the programming tool.

Using FPWIN GR
With the FPWIN GR, if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is
changed to the PROG. mode, the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically. Check
the contents of the self-diagnosed error.

Status display dialog box

If the error is an operation error, the error
address can be confirmed in this dialog
box.

Key Point:
To display the status display dialog box, select “Status Display” under “Online” on the menu bar.

Using FPWIN Pro

With the FPWIN Pro, the contents of the self-diagnostic error can be echked in the following PLC status
dialog box. Select "PLC status" under "Monitor" in the menu to display this dialog box.

PLC status dialog box

11-3
Procedure 2
<For error code is 1 to 9>
- Condition
There is a syntax error in the program.
- Operation 1
Change to PROG. mode and clear the error.
- Operation 2
Execute a total-check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error.
Or execute a check or compile using FPWIN Pro to determine the location of the syntax error.

<For error code is 20 or higher>

- Condition
A self-diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred.
- Operation
Use the programming tool in PROG. mode to clear the error.

Using FPWIN GR/FPWIN Pro

Click on the “Clear Error” button in the “Status display dialog box”. Error code 43 and higher can be
cleared.
• In the PROG. mode, the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error, but all of
the contents of the operation memory except hold type data arecleared.
• An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction F148 (ERR).

Key Point:
When an operation error (error code 45) occurs, the address at which the error occurred is stored in
special data registers DT90017 and DT90018. If this happens, click on the “Operation Err” button in the
“Status display dialog box” and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the
error.

11-4
11.2.2 If ERROR LED is ON
Condition: The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been
activated.

Procedure 1
Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG. mode and turn the power off and then on.
• If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned on again, there is probably an abnormality in the FP0R control
unit. Please contact your dealer.
• If the ERROR/ALARm LED is flashed, go to chapter 11.2.1.

Procedure 2
Set the mode selector from PROG. to RUN mode.
• If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned on, the program execution time is too long. Check the program.

Check
(1) Check if instructions such as “JMP” or “LOOP” are pgrogrammed in such a way that a scan never
finish.
(2) Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession.

11.2.3 ALL LEDs are OFF

Procedure 1
Check wiring of power supply.

Procedure 2
Check if the power supplied to the FP-X control unit is in the range of the rating.
• Be sure to check the fluctuation of the voltage.

Procedure 3
Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP-X control unit is
shared with them.
• If the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment, increase the capacity of the power supply or
prepare another power supply for other devices.
• Please contact your dealer for further questions.

11-5
11.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction
Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side.

Check of output condition 1: Output indicator LEDs are on

Procedure 1
Check the wiring of the loads.
Procedure 2
Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads.
• If the power is properly supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the load. Check the
load again.
• If the power is not supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the output section. Please
contact your dealer.

Check of output condition 2: Output indicator LEDS are off

Procedure 1
Monitor the output condition using a programming tool.
• If the output monitored is turned on, there is probably a duplicated output error.
Procedure 2
Forcing on the output using forcing input/output function.
• If the output indicator LED is turned on, go to input condition check.
• If the output indicator LED remains off, there is probably an abnormality in the output unit. Please
contact your dealer.

Check of input condition 1: Input indicator LEDs are off

Procedure 1
Check the wiring of the input devices.
Procedure 2
Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals.
• If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnoramlity in the input unit.
Please contact your dealer.
• If the power is not supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input device or
input power supply. Check the input device and input power supply.

Check of input condition 2: Input indicator LEDs are on

Procedure
Monitor the input condition using a programming tool.
• If the input monitored is off, there is probably an abnormality with the input unit. Please contact your
dealer.
• If the input monitored is on, check the leakage current at the input devices (e.g., two-wire type sensor)
and check the program again.

Check
(1) Check for the duplicated use of output. Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high-
level instruction.
(2)Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used.

11-6
11.2.5 A Protect Error Message Appears
When a password function is used
Procedure
Enter a password in the “Set PLC Password” menu (FPWIN GR), “Security settings” menu (FPWIN Pro)
and change it to the state to enable “Access”.
Using FPWIN GR
(1)Select “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
(2)The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed. Turn on the radio button next to
“Access”, enter a password, and click on the “Settings” button.

Set PLC password dialog box

Using FPWIN Pro

(1) Select "Security Settings" under "Online" on the menu bar.
(2)The security setting dialog box shown below is displayed. Input the password in the field of "PLC
access", and click the "Login" button.

11-7
11.2.6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN
Condition: A syntax error or a self-diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has ocurred.

Procedure 1
Check if the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing.

Example:
If the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing, check <11.2.1 If ERROR/ALARM LED is Flashing >.

Procedure 2
Execute a total check (FPWIN GR) or check/compile (FPWIN Pro) to determine the location of the
syntax error.
Using FPWIN GR
Select “Debug” on the menu bar, and select “Totally check program”. Click on the “Execute” button in the
total check dialog box.

Using FPWIN Pro

Select "Compile All" under "Project", or "Check" under "Object" on the menu bar.
As the dialog box is displayed, check the contents.

11-8
Chapter 12
Precautions During Programming
12.1 Use of Duplicated Output

12.1.1 Duplicated Output

What is duplicated output?
- Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same outptu in a sequence program.
- If the same output is specified for the "OT" and "KP" instructions, it is considered to be duplicated
output.
(Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions, such as the SET, RST instruction or high-
level instruction (such as data transfer), it is not regarded as duplicated output.)
- If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists, it will be normally flagged as an
error. (The ERROR/ALARM LED will flash and the self-diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on.)

How to check for duplicated use

You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool, by the following
method.

Using FPWIN GR
Select the "Debug" → "Totally Check Program" in the menu bar, and click "Execute". If there are any
duplicated outputs, an error message and the address will be displayed.

Using FPWIN Pro

If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message and the address will be displayed when compiling
programs.

Enabling duplicated output

- If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program, duplicated output can be
enabled.
- In this case, change the settign of system register 20 to "enable".
- When this is done, an error will not occur when the program is executed.

12-2
12.1.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP, SET or RST Instruction
Condition of internal and output relays during operation
- When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer
instructions and OT, KP, SET and RST instructions, the contents are rewritten at each step during
operation.
<Example> Processing when SET, RST and OT instructions are used (X0 to X2 are all on).

The output is determined by the final operation results

- If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT, KP, SET, RST or data transfer
functions, the output obtained at the I/O update is determined by the final results of the operation.
<Example> Output to the same output relay Y0 with OT, KP, SET and RST instructions.

When X0 to X2 are all on, Y0 is output as off at I/O update.

- If you need to outptu a result while processing is still in progress, use a partial I/O update instruction
(F143).

12-3
12.2 Handling BCD Data

12.2.1 BCD Data

BCD is an acronym for binary-coded decimal, and means that each digit of a decimal number is
expressed as a binary number.
<Example> Expressing a decimal number in BCD:

12.2.2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC

- When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7-segment display (with a
decoder), the data must be in BCD form.
In this case, use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples below.
- BCD arithmetic instructions (F40 to F58) also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data, however,
it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions (F20 to F38) as operation in the PLC
takes place binary.

Input from a digital switch

Use the BCD-to-BIN conversion instruction F81.

Output to a 7-segment display (with decoder)

Use the BIN-to-BCD conversion instruction F80.

12-4
12.3 Handling Index Registers

12.3.1 Index Registers

- Like other registers, index registers have 14 points, I0 to ID, for reading and writing 16-bit data.
- Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number. (This is called index modification.)
<Example> Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the
contents of an index register.

In this example, the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of I0 with
DT0 acting as a base. For example, when I0 contains K10, the destination will be DT10, and when I0 is
K20, the destination will be DT20.

- In this way, index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction,
and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data.

12.3.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers

- Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT.
<Example> I0WX0, I0WY1, I0WR0, I0SV0, I0EV2, I0DT100
- Constants can be also modified.
<Example> I0K10, I0H1001
- An index register cannot modify another index register.
<Example> I0I0, I0I1
- When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32-bit data, specify with I0. In this
case, I0 and I1 are handled together as 32-bit data.

12-5
12.3.3 Example of Using an Index Register
Repeatedly reading in external data
<Example> Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginnig from DT0.

When R0 turns on, 0 is written to index register I0.

When the R1 turns on, the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by
I0DT0.
Add 1 to I0.
In this case, the contents of I0 will change successively, and the destination data register will be as
follows.
Input times of R1 Contents of I0 Destination data register
1st 0 DT0
2nd 1 DT1
3rd 2 DT2
: : :

Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input

<Example 1> Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch

Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0.
Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified
by contents of I0.

<Example 2> Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital
switch

Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0.｡
Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by I0 to BCD, and output it to output relay
WY0.
12-6
12.4 Operation Errors

12.4.1 Outline of Operation Errors

- An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high-level instruction is
executed.
- When an operation error occurs, the ERROR/ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the
operation error flags (R9007 and R9008) will turn on.
- The operation error code "E45" is set at special data register DT90000.
- The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018.

Types of operation error

1. Address error
The memory address (number) specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used.
2. BCD data error
Operation is attempted on non-BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed, or BCD
conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range.
3. Parameter error
In an instruction requiring the specification of control data, the specified data is outside the possible
range.
4. Over area error
The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range.

12.4.2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs

- Normally, the operation stops when an operation error occurs.
- When you set system register 26 to "continuation", the control unit operates even if an operation error
occurs.
Using FPWIN GR
1. Set the mode of the CPU to RPOG.
2. Select the "Option" in "PLC Configuration" option from the menu bar.
3. On the "PLC Configuration" menu, select "Action on error". This displays system registers 20 to 26.
4. Remove the check of system register 26.
5. Press the "OK" to write the setting to the PLC.
Using FPWIN Pro
1. Change the mode to offline.
2. Select "Action on error" from the system register table of the project navigator.
3. Change the setting of No. 26.

12.4.3 Dealing with Operation Errors

<Procedure>
1. Check the location of the error.
Check the address where the error occurred, which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018, and make sure
the high-level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate.
2. Clear the error.
Use a programming tool to clear the error.
- When using FPWIN GR, select "Online" → "Status Display" in the menu bar.
Execute "Clear Error".
- When using FPWIN Pro, select "Monitor" → "PLC Status". Press the "Error Clear" button.

- An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG. mode, however, the contents of the
operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared.
- An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction (F148).
- If the mode selector is set to "RUN", RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared. So if the cause of
the error is not removed, the error may seem not to be cleared.
12-7
12.4.4 Points to Check in Program
1. Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register.｡
<Example> When a data register is modified using an index register

In this case, index register modifies the address of data register DT0. If data in I0 is too large, it will
exceed the addressable range of the data register. If the value exceeds the range, an operation error will
occur. The same is true when the contents of I0 are a negative value.

2. Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD ↔ BIN data conversion?
<Example> When BCD-to-BIN conversion is attempted

In this case, if DT0 contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4,
conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result.
<Example> When BIN-to-BCD conversion is attempted

In this case, if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999, an operation error will occur.

3. Check if the devisor of a division instruction is "0".

<Example>

In this case, if the content of DT100 is "0", an operation error will occur.

12-8
12.5 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method

12.5.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method

Instructions using the leading edge detection operation
1. DF (leading edge differential) instruction
2. Count input for CT (counter) instruction
3. Count input for F118 (UCD up-down counter) instruction
4. Shift input for SR (shift register) instruction
5. Shift input for F119 (LRSR left-right shift register) instruction
6. NSTP (next step) instruction
7. Differential execution type high-level instruction (P13)

Leading edge detection method

- An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger
(execution condition) is detected switching from off to on.
1. Standard operation

2. Leading edge detection operation

How to perform leading edge detection

The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared, and the
instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on. In any other
case, the instruction is not executed.

Precautions when usign an instruction which performs leading edge detection

- When RUN begins, for example when the system is powered on, the off -> on change of the execution
conditon (trigger) is not detected. Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next
page.
- When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 belowwhich change the order of
execution of instructions, the operation of hte instruction may change depending on input timing. Take
care regarding this point.

Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions, such
as;
1. MC and MCE instructions
2. JP and LBL instructions
3. LOOP and LBL instructions
4. CNDE instruction
5. Step ladder instructions
6. Subroutine instructions

12-9
12.5.2 Operation and Precautions When RUN starts
Operation of first scan after RUN begins
- The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN
mode, or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode, if the trigger (execution condition) is
already on.

- If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger (execution condition) is on prior to switching to
RUN mode, make a program as below using R9014 (initial pulse off relay). (R9014 is a special internal
relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan.)

<Example 1> DF (leading edge differential) instruction

<Example 2> CT (counter) instruction

12-10
12.5.3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction
- If a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction, it will be executed only under the
following condition: The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the
previous control instruction was reset, and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the
execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on.
- When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of
instruction execution such as MC, MCE, JP or LBL, the operation of the instruction may change as
follows depending on input timing. Take care regarding this point.

<Example 1> Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions

<Example 2> Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions

12-11
12.6 Precautions for Programming
Programs which are not executed correctly
Do no write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly.
<Example 1>

- When X1 was on prior to X0, Y0 will not be on even if X0 becomes on.

<Example 2>

- TMX5 will activate if X1 becomes on regardless of whether X0 is on or off.

<Example 3>

- When X2 was on prior to X0, Y1 will not be on even if X0 becomes on.

When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger (execution condition) of a differential instruction
(DF) or timer instruction, do not use an AND stack (ANS) instruction, read stack (RDS) instruction, or
pop stack (POPS) instruction.

Examples in which the above programs are rewritten correctly

<Program in which the example 1 is rewritten>

<Program in which the example 2 is rewritten>

<Program in which the example 3 is rewritten>

12-12
12.7 Rewrite Function During RUN

12.7.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN

How operation of rewrite during RUN is performed
Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode. When a rewrite is attempted during RUN, the
tool service time is temporarily extended, program rewriting is performed, and operation is resumed
without the need to change the mode. For this reason, the tiem of the scan during the RUN rewrite
extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms.

Operation during rewrite

1. External output (Y) is held.
2. External input (X) is ignored.
3. The timer (T) stops the clock.
4. Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions (DF), counter instructions (CT), and
left/right sift registers are ignored.
5. Interrupt functions are stopped.
6. Internal clock relays (special internal relays) are also stopped.
7. Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite.

Set values for timer/counter instructions

All set values specified with decimal constants (K) in timer and counter instructions are preset in the
corresponding set value areas (SV). Values in the elapsed value area (EV) do not change/

Operation of rewrite during RUN complete flag

The rewrite during RUN complete flag (R9034) is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first
scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode. It can be used instead of the initial pulse
relay following a change in the program.

12-13
12.7.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is Not Possible
When the timeout error message is indicated:
Even if the timeout error message is indicated, it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been
already rewritten. Carry out the following operations.

1. When ladder symbol mode

As a ladder editing is left, set it to the offline edit mode. Complete the program conversion in the tool
software, and then change to the online edit mode to check.
2. When boolean mode
A ladder editing is cleared.
Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again. After the operation, change to the
online edit mode to check.

When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display
Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN.
(The default setting is 5 seconds.)

Select "Transfer" from "File" in the menu bar.

The "Transfer data" screen will open.
Select "Condition" to open "Communication
Setting" screen.
Change the value for "Timeout".
Click "OK" button to complete the change of
setting.

12-14
Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN
1. When the result of rewriting is a syntax error.

<Example>
When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions.
1. Step ladder instructions (SSTP/STPE)
2. Subroutine instructions (SUB/RET)
3. Interrupt instructions (INT/IRET)
4. JP/LBL
5. LOOP/LBL
6. MC/MCE

Also, rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax error.

2. During the forced input/output operation

Interrupt restrictions
When using interrupt, high-speed counter, pulse output or PWM output functions, do not perform a
rewrite during RUN.
If a rewrite during RUN is executed, the operation as below will be performed. Exercise caution.

1. Interrupt programs will be disabled.

Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again.
<Example> Using R9034 (rewrite during RUN completed flag)

2. The high-speed counter will continue to count.

Target value match on/off instructions (F166/F167) will continue.
Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166/F167 instruction is running.

3. Pulse output and PWM output will be stopped.

State Instructon number Name

Continue F171(SPDH) Pulse output (with channel specification) (Home position return)
Stop F172(PLSH) Pulse output (with channel specification) (JOG operation)
Stop F173(PLSH) PWM output (with channel specification)
Continue F174(SP0H) Pulse output (with channel specification) (Selectable data table
control operation)
Continue F175(SPSH) Pulse output (Linear interpolation)
Stop F176(SPCH) Pulse output (Circular interpolation)

4. The regular sampling trace will not stop.

12-15
12.7.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN
FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Item
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Maximum of 128 steps.
Changes are performed by block.
When PG conversion is executed
online, the program will be Rewriting performed by step.
rewritten. Caution is required as rewriting
Rewrite procedure
takes place simultaneously with the
change.

If an instruction written in block a is

detected in block b, the condition
before the rewrite will be held. Y
If an instruction written in block a is
contact relays which are on will be
OT/KP detected in block b, the condition
held in the on state. To turn them
before the rewrite will be held.
off in the RUN mode, use forced
output. To turn them off in the RUN
mode, use forced output.
If an instruction written in block a is If an instruction written in block a is
detected in block b, the condition detected in block b, the condition
before the rewrite will be held. before the rewrite will be held.
Set values specified by K constants Set values specified by K constants
TM/CT
in TM/CT instructions are preset in in TM/CT instructions are preset in
all of the corresponding SV in the all of the corresponding SV in the
program. (Elapsed values EV do program. (Elapsed values EV do
not change.) not change.)
Operation
Fun If an instruction written in block a is
of each ･If deleted, the output memory area
High-level detected in block b, the condition
instruction will be held.
instructions before the rewrite will be held.
Writing or deleting a single
When writing MC/MEC instructions, instruction during RUN is not
MC/
be sure to write the instructions as a possible.
MCE
pair. Write or delete the instruction in
FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode.
A subroutine is a program
CALL/ appearing between SUBn and RET Write in the order: RET, SUB, CALL
SUB/ instructions. Delete in the order: CALL, SUB,
RET Be sure to write it to an address RET
which follows the ED instruction.
An interrupt program is a program
appearing between INTn and IRET
INT/ Write in the order: IRET, INT
instructions. Be sure to write it to an
IRET Delete in the order: INT, IRET
address which follows the ED
instruction.

12-16
 FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Item
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Writing and deletion of a single
instruction is not possible for a
program with no step ladder area.
A distance with the same number Write or delete both instructions
SSTP/ cannot be defined twice. simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder
STPE An SSTP instruction cannot be symbol mode.
Operation
written in a subprogram. In the case of an SSTP instruction
of each
only, writing and deletion of a single
instruction
instruction is possible for a program
with a step ladder area.
Write in the order: JP-LBL or
Be sure to write the instruction for
JP/ LOOP-LBL
setting the loop number before LBL-
LOOP/LBL Delete in the order: LBL-JP or LBL-
LOOP instructions.
LOOP

12-17
12.8 Processing During Forced Input and Output

12.8.1 Processing When Forced Input/Output is Initiated During RUN

1. Processing of external input (X)

- Regardless of the state of the input from the input device, forced on/off operation will take precedence
at a contact specified for forced input/output in the above procedure B. At this time, the input LED will
not blink, however, the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten.
- As for contacts not specified, the on/off state will be read according to the input status from the input
device.

2. Processing of external output (Y)

- Regardless of the state of the result of operation, forced on/off will take precedence at a contact
specified for forced input/output in the above procedure A. At this time, the area of output Y in the
operation memory will be forcibly rewritten. External output will take place according to the input/output
update timing in the above diagram.
- The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.

3. Processing of Timer (T) and Counter (C)

- Regardless of the timer/counter input condition, forced on/off operation will take precedence at a
contact specified for forced input/output. At this time, the contact of the timer (T) or counter (C) in the
operation memory will be rewritten. Timing and counting will not take place during control.
- The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.

Operation during operation

For small-sized PLCs FP0, FP0R, FPΣ and FP-X
The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of
operation. However, as the R or Y is set/reset again right before the peripheral service (as the above
procedure C), the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly
rewritten to a specified value.

For medium-sized PLCs FP2, FP2SH

For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction, the value of the forced
processing has a priority. When rewritten by a high-level instruction, the result of the instruction has a
priority.
12-18
Chapter 13
Specifications
13.1 Table of Specifications

13.1.1 General Specifications

Item Description
Rated operating voltage 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Allowable momentary C10, C14, C16: 5 ms(at 20.4 V), 10 ms(at 21.6 V)
power off time C32, T32, F32 : 10 ms(at 20.4 V)
Fuse Built-in (Not replaceable)
Ambient temperature 0 to +55 °C
Storage temperature -40 to +70 °C (T32 only: -20 to +70 °C)
Ambient humidity 10 to 95 % RH (at 25 °C, No condensation)
Storage humidity 10 to 95 % RH (at 25 °C, No condensation)
Tr output type Ry output type
Between “input terminals” and “output 500 V AC 1500 V AC
terminals” for 1 minute for 1 minute
Between “output terminals” and “output 1500 V AC
-
terminals” (Between different commons) for 1 minute
Breakdown voltage
Between “input terminals” and “power/ground 500 V AC 500 V AC
(Detection current: 5 mA)
terminals” for 1 minute for 1 minute
Between “output terminals” and 500 V AC 1500 V AC
“power/ground terminals” for 1 minute for 1 minute
Between “ground terminal” and “power 500 V AC 500 V AC
terminal” for 1 minute for 1 minute
Tr output type Ry output type
Between “input terminals” and “output
Over 100 MΩ Over 100 MΩ
terminals”
Between “output terminals” and “output
- Over 100 MΩ
terminals” (Between different commons)
Insulation resistance
Between “input terminals” and “power/ground
(Test voltage: 500 V DC) Over 100 MΩ Over 100 MΩ
terminals”
Between “output terminals” and
Over 100 MΩ Over 100 MΩ
“power/ground terminals”
Between “ground terminals” and “power
Over 100 MΩ Over 100 MΩ
terminal”
5 to 9 Hz, Single amplitude of 3.5 mm, 1 sweep/min.,
Vibration resistance 9 to 150 Hz, Constant acceleration of 9.3 m/s2, 1 sweep/min.,
10 min. on 3 axes (Towards X,Y & Z directions)
Shock resistance 147 m/s2, 4 times on 3 axes (Towards X,Y & Z directions)
1000 V[P-P] with pulse width 50 ns, 1μs (using a noise simulator)
Noise immunity
(Power supply terminal)
Operating condition Must be free from corrosive gases and excessive dust
Overvoltage category Category II
Pollution level Pollution level 2
Weight C10: 100 g, C14: 105 g, C16: 85 g, C32: 115 g, T32: 115 g, F32: 120 g

13-2
Unit’s current consumption table
Control unit Expansion Input circuit Output circuit
current unit current current current
consumption consumption consumption consumption
This is the current This is the This is the This is the
consumed from current current current
the control unit consumed from consumed by consumed by the
power supply the expansion the input circuits output circuits of
connector. If unit power of the various the various units.
expansion units or supply units. This value This value
intelligent units connector. If a indicates the indicates the
are added, the unit is not listed current that current used to
current is below, it means flows into the drive the output
increased by the that it has no input circuit. circuits. This
value indicated power supply value does not
below. connector include the load
current value.
FP0R-C10 100 mA or less − 15.9 mA or less −
FP0R-C14 120 mA or less − 21.1 mA or less −
FP0R FP0R-C16 70 mA or less − 21.1 mA or less 20 mA or less
control unit FP0R-C32
FP0R-T32 90 mA or less − 42.2 mA or less 40 mA or less
FP0R-F32
FP0-E8X 10 mA or less 34.4 mA or less −
FP0-E8R 15 mA or less 50 mA or less 17.2 mA or less −
FP0-E8YR 10 mA or less 100 mA or less − −
FP0-E8YT/P 15 mA or less − − 24 mA or less
FP0 expan-
FP0-E16X 20 mA or less − 68.8 mA or less −
sion unit
FP0-E16R 20 mA or less 100 mA or less 34.4 mA or less −
FP0-E16T/P 25 mA or less − 34.4 ma or less 24 mA or less
FP0-E16YT/P 25 mA or less − − 48 mA or less
FP0-E32T/P 40 mA or less − 68.8 mA or less 48 mA or less
FP0-A21 20 mA or less 100 mA or less − −
FP0-A80 20 mA or less 60 mA or less − −
FP0-A04V 20 mA or less 100 mA or less − −
FP0 FP0-A04I 20 mA or less 130 mA or less − −
intelligent FP0-TC4
unit FP0-TC8 25 mA or less − − −
FP0-RTD6
FP0-IOL 30 mA or less 40 mA or less − −
FP0-CCLS 40 mA or less 40 mA or less − −
Programma
ble display
GT01,
AIGT0030
GT01R (5 80 mA or less − − −
AIGT0230
VDC,
RS232C
type)
C-NET
AFP15402 50 mA or less − − −
adapter S2

13-3
13.1.2 Control Specifications
Item C10, C14 C16 C32 T32 F32
Programming method Relay symbol
Control method Cyclic operation
Program Built-in memory Flash ROM
memory Memory capacity 16000 steps 32000 steps
Rewriting during Available (Simultaneous rewriting capacity: 512 steps)
RUN
Download during Available (All programs)
RUN
Security function Password function (4-digit, 8-digit), Read protection setting
Comment Memory capacity 328 kbytes (All comments including I/O comments, annotations,
memory interlinear comments)
Download during Available (All comments)
RUN
Without expansion units: 0.2 ms or less
I/O update time & base time With expansion units: 0.2 ms or less + (1×the number of expansion
unit) ms
Basic instruction: from 0.08 μs, Timer instruction: 2.2 μs,
Up to 3k steps
Operation High-level instruction: from 0.32μs (MV instruction)
speed Basic instruction: from 0.58 μs, Timer instruction: 3.66 μs,
After 3k steps
High-level instruction: from 1.62μs (MV instruction)
Basic instruction Approx. 110 types
High-level instruction Approx. 210 types
External input (X) 1760 points
External output (Y) 1760 points
Internal Relay (R) 4096 points
Special Internal Relay(R) 224 points
Link Relay (L) 2048 points
1024 points (Factory default: Timer 1008 points: T0 to T1007,
Timer/Counter (T/C)
Counter 16 points: C1008 to C1023)
Data register(DT) 12315 words 32765 words
Special data register(DT) 440 words (DT90000 to DT90443)
Link data register (LD) 256 words
Index register (I0 to ID) 14 words
Master control relay(MCR) 256 points
Number of labels (JMP, LOOP) 256 labels
Differential points Number of points that is within the program capacity
Number of step ladder 1000 stages
Number of subroutines 500 subroutines
Avaialble Smapling by commands/Sampling at regular time
intervals
Sampling trace For one sampling: 16 bits + 3 words
C10/C14/C16=300 samples
C32/T32/F32=1000 samples
High speed counter (HSC) At single phase 6 points (Max. 50 kHz) or second phase 3 points
*1
(Max. 15 kHz)
Pulse output - 4 points (Max. 50 kHz) *1 *2
PWM output - 4 points (Max. 4.8 kHz) *1 *2
Pulse catch input 8 points in total (including HSC and interrupt input)
Interrupt program Input: 8 programs (C10 only. Input: 6 programs)
Periodical: 1 program
Pulse match: 4 programs
Periodical interrupt 0.5 ms unit: 0.5 ms to 1.5 s/10 ms unit: 10 ms to 30 s
Constant scan 0.5 ms unit: 0.5 ms to 600 ms

13-4
 Item C10, C14 C16 C32 T32 F32
Backup by F12, *4
All areas
Flash P13Instruction
ROM Counter: 16 points
Backup*3 Auto backup when
Internal relay: 128 points -
power is OFF *4
Data register : 315 words
All areas *5
(Built-in
RAM backup - All areas *5
backup
battery) *6
*7
Clock/Calendar - Available -
Communication port Tool port/USB port/COM port (RS232C port) (Only type with C)
Self-diagnosis functions Watchdog timer (Approx. 690 ms), program syntax checking
*1) The specification is when rated input voltage is at 24 V DC and temperature at 25 °C.
Frequency may decrease depending on voltage, temperature or operating condition.
*2) No. of channels: A total of 4 channels is available for pulse output and PWM output.
Frequency: Pulse output can be specified up to 50 kHz. PWM output can be specified up to 4.8 kHz.
An error on the pulse width that is a maximum of 40μs may occur for the setting value depending on
voltage, temperature or operating condition.
*3) Guaranteed number of writing is up to 10000 times.
*4) Auto backup area when power is off
Type C10, C14, C16 C32, T32
C1008 to 1023 (C: Contact, EV: Elapsed value) C1008 to 1023 (C: Contact, EV: Elapsed value)
Backup
R2480 to 255F R2480 to 255F
area
DT12000 to 12314 DT32450 to 32764
*5) All the areas of timer/counter, internal relays, link relays, link registers and data registers can be held.
Non-hold areas and hold areas can be specified by the setting of system register.
*6) Notes about built-in backup battery (T32 only)
Secondary battery is used for this product.
It has not been charged when it is shipped from the factory. Energize and charge it before you use it.
The secondary battery does not have a function to notify the battery voltage reduction. However, if
the battery is out of charge and the hold area becomes indefinite, the values in the hold areas will be
cleared to 0 when the power is turned on next time.
(We recommend to add a program for clearing the data to 0 when the values in hold areas become
indefinite.)
- Relation between charging time and backup time

- Backup time
When ambient temperature is 70 °C: 14 days
When ambient temperature is 25 °C: 50 days
When ambient temperature is -20 °C: 25 days
- Predicted backup life
When ambient temperature is 55 °C: 430 days
When ambient temperature is 45 °C: 1200 days
When ambient temperature is 40 °C: 2100 days
When ambient temperature is 35 °C: 3300 days
When ambient temperature is 34 °C or lower: 10 years
(The temperature when the power is off has little influence on the battery life.)
*7) Precision of Clock/Calendar (T32 only):
When ambient temperature is 0 °C: Less than 104 seconds per month
When ambient temperature is 25 °C: Less than 51 seconds per month
When ambient temperature is 55 °C: Less than 155 seconds per month
13-5
13.1.3 Communication Specifications
Tool port
Description
Interface RS232C
Transmission distance 15 m
Baud rate 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 bit/s
Communication method Half-duplex operation
Synchro system Asynchronous communication method
Data length 7 bits / 8 bits
Parity: None/Even/Odd
Transmission format Start code: STX / No STX
End code: CR / CR+LF / None / ETX
Stop bit: 1 bit / 2 bits
Order of data transmission Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Communication function Computer link (Slave)
Modem initialization
General-purpose communication (In the RUN mode only)

USB port
Description
Standard (Baud rate) USB2.0 Fullspeed
Communication mode Computer link (Slave)

COM port (RS232C port) (C10CR, C14CR, C16C, C32C, T32C, F32C)
Description
Interface RS232C
Transmission distance 15 m
Baud rate 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 bit/s
Communication method Half-duplex communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Data length: 7 bits/8bits
Parity: None/Even/Odd
Communication format Start code: STX/No STX
End code: CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
Order of data transmission Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Computer link (Master/Slave)
Modem initialization
General-purpose communication
Communication function
MODBUS RTU (Master/Slave)
PC(PLC) link (A maximum of 16 units can be connected by converting
to RS485.)

Factory default
Baud rate Data length Parity Stop bit
Tool port 9600 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit
COM port (RS232C port) 9600 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit

13-6
13.2 I/O Number Allocation

13.2.1 I/O Numbers for FP0R Control Unit

The I/O allocation for the FP0R control unit is fixed.
Unit type Allocation points I/O No.
Input: 6 points X0 to X5
C10
Output: 4 points Y0 to Y3
Input: 8 points X0 to X7
C14
Output: 6 points Y0 to Y5
Input: 8 points X0 to X7
C16
Output: 8 points Y0 to Y7
Input: 16 points X0 to XF
C32/T32/F32
Output: 16 points Y0 to YF

13-7
13.2.2 I/O Numbers for FP0 Expansion Unit
• I/O numbers do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an
expansion I/O unit is added.
• The I/O allocation for expansion units is determined by the installation location.
Expansion Expansion Expansion
Unit type Allocation points
unit 1 unit 2 unit 3
FP0-E8X Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
Input: 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63
FP0-E8R
Output: 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63
FP0-E8YT/P
Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
FP0-E8YR
FP0 expansion
FP0-E16X Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
unit
FP0-E16R Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
FP0-E16T/P Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
FP0-E16YT/P Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
FP0-E32T/P
Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
Input: 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6
(ch0) (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 analog I/O Input: 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-A21
unit (ch1) (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output: 16 points
(Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
FP0 A/D Input: 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6
converter unit FP0-A80 (ch0, 2, 4, 6) (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 FP0-TC4
thermocouple FP0-TC8 Input: 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7
unit (ch1, 3, 5, 7) (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WX2 WX4 WX6
Input: 16 points
(X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 D/A FP0-A04V Output: 16 points WY2 WY4 WY6
converter unit FP0-A04I (ch0, 2) (Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
Output: 16 points WY3 WY5 WY7
(ch1, 3) (Y30 to Y3F) (Y50 to Y5F) (Y70 to Y7F)
FP0 I/O link Input: 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F
FP0-IOL
unit Output: 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F
Input (16 points) WX2 WX4 WX6
CH0, 2, 4 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 Input (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-RTD
RTD unit CH1, 3, 5 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output (16 points)
(Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
• The data of each channel for FP0 A/D converter unit (FP0-A80), FP0 thermocouple unit (FP0-
TC4/FP0-TC8), FP0 D/A converter unit (FP0-A04V/P0-A04I) is switched and read/write using a
program that includes the flag for switching converted data.
• Regarding FP0 CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.

13-8
13.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants
Number of points and range of
Item memory area available for use Function
C10, C14, C16 C32, T32, F32
External input Note1) (X) 1760 points (X0 to X109F) Turns on or off based on external input.
External output Note1) (Y) 1760 points (Y0 to Y109F) Externally outputs on or off state
Internal relay Note2) (R) 4096 points (R0 to R255F) Relay which turns on or off only within program.
Link relay Note2) (L) 2048 points (L0 to L127F) This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link.
This goes on when the timer reaches the
Relay

Timer Note2) (T) specified time. It corresponds to the timer

1024 points (T0 to T1007/C1008 to
number.
C1023) Note3)
This goes on when the counter increments. It
Counter Note2) (C)
corresponds to the counter number.
Relay which turns on or off based on specific
Special internal relay (R) 224 points (from R9000)
conditions and is used as a flag.
Code for speciyfying 16 external input points as
External input Note1) (WX) 110 words (WX0 to WX109)
one word (16 bits) of data.
Note1)
External output Code for specifying 16 external output points as
110 words (WY0 to WY109)
(WY) one word (16 bits) of data.
Note2) Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as
Internal relay (WR) 256 words (WR0 to WR255)
one word (16 bits) of data.
Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one
Link relay (WL) 128 words (WL0 to WL127)
word (16 bits) of data.
12315 words 32765 words
Data memory used in program. Data is handled
Data register Note2) (DT) (DT0 to (DT0 to
Memory area

in 16-bit units (one word).

DT12314) DT32764)
This is a shared data memory which is used
Link register Note2) (LD) 256 words (LD0 to LD255) within the PLC link. Data is handled in 16-bit
units (one word).
Data memory for storing a target value of a timer
Timer/Counter set value
1024 words (SV0 to SV1023) and setting value of a counter. Stores by
area Note2) (SV)
timer/counter number
Data memory for storing the elapsed value
Timer/Couner elapsed
1024 words (EV0 to EV1023) during operation of a timer/counter. Stores by
value area Note2) (EV)
timer/counter number.
Special data register 440 words Data memory for storing specific data. Various
(DT) (DT90000 to DT90439) settings and error codes are stored.
Register can be used as an address of memory
Index register (I) 14 words (I0 to ID)
area and constants modifier.
Master control relay
256 points
points (MCR)
Instruction point

Number of labels
256 points
(JP and LOOP)
Control

Number of step ladders 1000 stages

Number of subroutines 500 subroutines
C10: 11 programs (6 external input points, 1 periodical interrupt point, 4-pulse match
Number of interrupt points)
programs Other than C10: 13 programs (8 external input points, 1 periodical interrupt point, 4-
pulse match points)
Decimal constants K-32, 768 to K32, 767 (for 16-bit operation)
(Integer type) (K) K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K2, 147, 483, 647 (for 32-bit operation)
Constant

Hexadecimal constants H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation)

(H) H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)
F-1.175494 x 10-38 to F-3.402823 x 1038
Floating point type (F)
F 1.175494 x 10-38 to F 3.402823 x 1038
Note1) The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory. The actual number of
points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.
Note2) There are two types, one is the hold type that the last state is stored even if the power supply turns off or the
mode is changed to PROG. mode from RUN mode, and the other is the non-hold type that the state is reset.
For C10/C14/C16/C32: The hold type areas and non-hold type areas are fixed. For information on the
sections of each area, refer to the performance specifications.
For T32/F32: The settings of the hold type areas and non-hold type areas can be changed using the system
registers.
On T32, if the battery has run out, the data in the hold area may be indefinite (Not cleared to 0)
Note3) The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5. The number given in
the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.

13-9
13.4 Power Supply Unit and I/O Link Unit Specifications

13.4.1 Power Supply Unit Specifications (AFP0634)

Item Description
Input Rated operating voltage 100-240 V AC
Operating voltage range 85-264 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Operating frequency 47 to 63 Hz
The number of phase Single phase
Inrush current 30 A(0-p) or less (Cold start)
Leakage current 0.75 mA or less
Holding time 10 ms or more
Output Rated voltage 24 V DC
Voltage accuracy ±5%
Rated current 0.7 A
Operating output current 0 to 0.7 A
Output ripple 500 mV or less
Over current regulation 0.735 A or more
Over voltage regulation Possible
Life time 20000h ( at 55 °C)

13.4.2 I/O Link Unit Specifications (AFP0732)

Item Description
Communication method Two-wire half-duplex communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Duplex cable (twsited-pair cable or
Transmission line
VCTF 0.75 mm2 x 2C <JIS> or equivalent)
Max. 700 m (when using twisted-pair cable)
Transmission distance (Total length)
Max. 400 m (when using VCTF cable)
Baud rate 0.5Mbps
No. of I/O points per one I/O link unit 64 points (Input: 32 points + Output: 32 points) Note)
Remote I/O map allocation 32X/32Y
Interface RS485-compliant
Transmission error check CRC method
Note) Those numbers of points are the numbers that can be used for I/O link via a host computer and
the network MEWNET-F. When setting the output of the I/O link error flag to ON (available), it is 63
points (31 input points & 32 input points).

13-10
Chapter 14
Dimensions and Others
14.1 Dimensions

14.1.1 C10/C14 Control Unit (Terminal Block)

(Unit: mm)
Note) As for the FP0 expansion unit, refer to the dimensions only.
Target FP0 expansion units: FP0-E8RS, E16RS

14-2
14.1.2 C10/C14 Control Unit (Molex Connector)

(Unit: mm)
Note) As for the FP0 expansion unit, refer to the dimensions only.
Target FP0 expansion units: FP0-E8RM,E16RM

14-3
14.1.3 C16 Control Unit (MIL Connector)

(Unit: mm)
Note) As for the FP0 expansion unit, refer to the dimensions only.
Target FP0 expansion units: FP0-E32T, E32P
FP0-E16X, E16YT, E16YP, E16T, E16P
FP0-E8X, E8YT, E8YP

14-4
14.1.4 C32/T32/F32 Control Unit (MIL Connector)

(Unit: mm)

14-5
14.1.5 Power Supply Unit

(Unit: mm)

14.1.6 I/O Link Unit

(Unit: mm)

14.1.7 When Using DIN Rail

(Unit: mm)

14-6
14.2 Cable/Adapter Specifications

14.2.1 Type of Cables

Usable cables
Usable model
Model No. of EOL (end-of-life) models
Cable FP0 FP2/
FP-X FPΣ FP-e FP10SH FP-M FP1 FP3
FP0R FP2SH
AFC8503
A A A A A A
AFC8503S
AFC8513 A A A A A A
AFC8521
A A A
AFC8523
AFB85853 A A A A A
AFB85813 A A A A A
AFB85843 A A A A A
AFC85305
AFC8531 A A A A A A
AFC8532
AIP81862N A A A A A
AFP15205
A
AFP1523
AFP5520
A
AFP5523
AFP8550 A A
A: Available

14.2.2 AFC8503/AFC8503S (DOS/V PC)

(Unit: mm)

14-7
14.2.3 AFC8513 (PC98 PC)

(Unit: mm)

14.2.4 AFC8521/AFC8523 (Programmer)

(Unit: mm)

14.2.5 AFC85853 ( 9-pin (male) – 9-pin (female)

(Unit: mm)

14-8
14.2.6 AFB85813 (9-pin (male) – 25-pin (male)

(Unit: mm)

14.2.7 AFB85843 (Straight cable for connecting a modem: 9-pin (male) – 25-pin
(male)

(Unit: mm)

14.2.8 AFC85305/AFC8531/AFC8532 (For extending for the tool port)

(Unit: mm)

14-9
14.2.9 AIP81862N (RS232 port)

(Unit: mm)

14.2.10 AFP15205/AFP1523 (End-of-life (EOL) product)

(Unit: mm)

14.2.11 AFP5520/AFP5523 (End-of-life (EOL) product)

(Unit: mm)

14-10
14.2.12 AFP8550 (End-of-life (EOL) product)

(Unit: mm)

14-11
14-12
Chapter 15
Appendix
 Appendix ...................................................................................... 15-1

15.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special Data Registers... 15-3
15.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0R......................................................15-5
15.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0R...........................................15-11
15.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0R ...........................................15-21

15.2 Table of Basic Instructions .................................................................. 15-40

15.3 Table of High-level Instructions ........................................................... 15-48

15.4 Table of Error codes............................................................................ 15-68

15.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands ................................ 15-81

15.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD.................................................................... 15-82

15.7 ASCII Codes........................................................................................ 15-83

15-2
15.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special
Data Registers
Precation for System Registers

What is the system register area

• System registers are used to set values (parameters) which determine operation ranges and functions
used. Set values based on the use and specifications of your program.
• There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used.

Type of system registers

The registers to be used depend on each PLC.

(1) Allocation of user memory (System registers 0, 1 and 2)

These registers set the size of the program area and file register area, allowing the user memory area to
be configured for the environment used. The size of the memory area will vary depending on the type.
(2) Allocation of timers and counters (System register 5)
The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number.
(3) Hold/non-hold type setting (System registers 6 to 18)
When these registers are set to “hold type”, the values in the relays and data memory will be retained
even if the system is switched to PROG. mode or the power is turned off. If set to “non-hold type”, the
values will be cleared to “0”.
(4) Operation mode setting on error (System registers 4, 20 to 28)
Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error, duplicated use of output, I/O verification error
and operation error occur.
(5) Time settings (System registers 30 to 34)
Set time-out error detection time and the constant scan time.
(6) Remote I/O operation settings (System registers 35 and 36)
These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave station connection when the remote
I/O is started, and the remote I/O update timing.
(7) MEWNET-W0/MEWNET-W/P PLC link settings (System registers 40 to 47, 50 to 55, and 57)
These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET-W0/MEWNET-W/P PC(PLC) link
communication.
Note) The default value setting is “no PC(PLC) link communication”.
(8) MEWNET-H PC(PLC) link settings (System register 49)
Set the data size to be processed during one scan in the MEWNET-H PC(PLC) link communication.
(9) Input settings (System registers 400 to 406)
When using the high-speed counter function, pulse catch function or interrupt function, set the operation
mode and the input number to be used for the function.
(10) Input time constant settings (FP1/FP-M System registers 404 to 407)
Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering
or noises.
(11) Number of temperature input averaging process settings (System register 409)
The number of averaging times can be set in order to even out the variation in the input thermocouple
values. For normal use it, set the number of times to t least twenty. For default value “0”, the number of
average processing times is 20.
(12) Tool and COM. ports communication settings (System registers 410 to 421)
Set these registers when the Tool port,and COM1 and COM2 ports are to be used for computer link,
general-purpose serial communication, PC(PLC) link, and modem communication.Note that
the default setting is computer link mode.

15-3
Checking and changing the set value of system register
If you are going to use a value which is already set(the value which appears when read),
there is no need write it again.

Using programming tool software

Produce:
1. Set the control unit in the PROG mode.
2.Option ->PLC Configuration
3.When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration
dialog box,the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed.
To change the value and setting status,write in the new value and /or select the setting status.
4.To register these settings,choose OK

Precautions for system register setting

-System register settings are effective from the time they are set.
However, input settings,tool port,COM port,and modem connection settings become effective when the
mode is changed from PROG. to RUN. With regard to the modem connection setting, when the power
is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN, the controller sends a
command to the modem which enables it for reception.
-When the initialized operation is performed, all set system register values (parameters) will be initialized

15-4
15.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Starting number setting for
5 1008 0 to 1024
counter
Hold type area starting number
6 setting for timer and counter 1008 0 to 1024
(T32/F32)
Hold type area starting number
7 setting for internal relays 248 0 to 256
(T32/F32)
Hold/
Hold type area starting number
Non-
hold 1
8 setting for data registers 0 0 to 32765
(T32/F32)
Hold or non-hold setting for step
14 ladder process Non-hold Hold/Non-hold
(T32/F32)
Previous value is held for a
leading edge detection Hold/
4 Hold
instruction (DF instrucion) with Non-hold
Note)
MC
Hold type area starting word
10 number for PC(PLC) link relays 0 0 to 64
(for PC(PLC) link 0) (T32/F32)
Hold type area starting word
11 number for PC(PLC) link relays 64 64 to 128
Hold/
(for PC(PLC) link 1) (T32/F32)
Non-
Hold type area starting number
hold 2
12 for PC(PLC) link registers 0 0 to 128
(for PC(PLC) link 0) (T32/F32)
Hold type area starting number
13 for PC(PLC) link registers 128 128 to 256
(for PC(PLC) link 1) (T32/F32)
Disable or enable setting for
20 Disabled Disabled/Enabled
duplicated output
Action
Operation setting when an I/O
on 23 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
verification error occurs
error
Operation setting when an
26 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
operation error occurs
Wait time setting for multi-frame 6500.0
31 10 to 81900 ms
communication ms
Communication timeout setting
Time 10000.0
32 for SEND/RECV, RMRD/RMWT 10 to 81900 ms
set- ms
commands
ting
0: Normal scan
Constant value settings for scan Normal
34 0 to 600 ms: Scans once each
time scan
specified time interval

15-5
 FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Range of link relays used for
40 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers
41 0 0 to 128 words
used for PC(PLC) link
Starting word number for link
PC 42 0 0 to 63
relay transmission
(PLC)
43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
link 0
Starting number for link data
set- 44 0 0 to 127
register tranmission
ting
Link data register transmission
45 0 0 to 127 words
size
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal/reverse
Maximum unit number setting
47 16 1 to 16
for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
Range of link relays used for
50 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers
51 0 0 to 128 words
used for PC(PLC) link
PC Starting word number for link
52 64 64 to 127
(PLC) relay transmission
link 1 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
set- Starting number for link data
54 128 128 to 255
ting) register tranmission
Link data register transmission
55 0 0 to 127 words
size
Maximum unit number setting
57 16 1 to 16
for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link

15-6
 FP0R
No. Name Default value Descriptions
Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X0, X1)
Two-phase input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)
Incremental input (X0)
CH0: Incremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
Do not set input Decremental input (X0)
High-speed CH0
X0 as high-speed Decremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
counter
counter Individual input (X0, X1)
operation
400 Individual input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)
mode
Incremental/decremental control input (X0, X1)
settings (X0
Incremental/decremental control input (X0, X1),
to X2)
Reset input (X2)
Controller input settings 1

Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter.

CH1:
High-speed counter

Incremental input (X1)

Do not set input
CH1 Incremental inptu (X1), Reset input (X2)
X1 as high-speed
Decremental input (X1)
counter
Decremental input (X1), Reset input (X2)
Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X3, X4)
Two-phase input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
Incremental input (X3)
CH2: Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5)
Do not set input Decremental input (X5)
High-speed CH2
X3 as high-speed Decremental input (X5), Reset input (X5)
counter
counter Individual input (X3, X4)
operation
400 Individual input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
mode
Incremental/decremental control (X3, X4)
settings (X3
Incremental/decremental control (X3, X4),
to X5)
Reset input (X5)
Does not set input X4 as high-speed counter.
CH3:
Incremental input (X4)
Does not set
CH3 Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
input X4 as high-
Decremental input (X4)
speed counter
Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
Do not set input X6 as high-speed counter.
High-speed counter

CH4: Incremental input (X6)

Controller input

Do not set input Decremental input (X6)

High-speed CH4
settings 2

X6 as high-speed Two-phase input (X6, X7)

counter/
counter Individual input (X6, X7)
401 pulse output
Incremental/decremental control input (X6, X7)
settings
CH5:
(X6 to X7)
Do not set input X7 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input
CH5 Incremental input (X7)
X7 as high-speed
Decremental input (X7)
counter
Note1) If the operation mode is set to Two-phase, incremental/decremental, or incremental/decremental
control, the setting for CH1 or CH3 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CH5 is
invalid in system register 401.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the
CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the follwing
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter]→[Pulse catch]→[Interrupt input].
<Example>
When the high-speed counter is being used in the addition input mode, even if input X0 is
specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and X0
functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.

15-7
 FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Normal output (Y0, Y1)
Pulse output (Y0, Y1)
CH0: Pulse output (Y0, Y1)/Home input X4
Normal
Controller output settings 2 (PLS/PWM)

Pulse output (Y0, Y1)/Home input X4/Position

output control starting input X0
PWM output (Y0), Normal output (Y1)
Transistor type C16 or over

Normal output (Y2, Y3)

Pulse output (Y2, Y3)
CH1: Pulse output (Y2, Y3)/Home input X5
Normal Pulse output (Y3, Y4)/Home input X5/Position
Pulse/ output control starting input X1
PWM output PWM output (Y2), Normal output (Y3)
402 Normal output (Y4, Y5)
settings
Pulse output (Y4, Y5)
(Y0 to Y7) CH2: Pulse output (Y4, Y5)/Home input X6
Normal Pulse output (Y4, Y5)/Home input X6/Position
output control starting input X2
PWM output (Y4), Normal output (Y5)
Normal output (Y6, Y7)
Pulse output (Y6, Y7)
CH3: Pulse output (Y6, Y7)/Home input X7
Normal Pulse output (Y6, Y7)/Home input X7/Position
output control starting input X3
PWM output (Y6), Normal output (Y7)

Inter- Pulse catch

403 Not set
rupt/ input settings
The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch.
Pulse
catch Interrupt input
settings 404 Not set
settings
The pressed contact is set for the interrupt input.
Inter-
Interrupt edge
rupt Leading
405 setting for
edge edge
settings controller input
The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge.
Note1) When using the pulse output/PWM output, the controller output settings must be specified.
The output that has been set to the pulse output/PWM output cannot be used as the normal
output.
Note2) X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CH0 to CH3.
When using the home return function of the pulse output, always set the home input. In that
case, X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high-speed counter.
Note3) C16 type:
- For performing the home return for the pulse output CH0 with deviation counter clear, the
above Y6 should be set to the normal output to use Y6 for the deviation counter clear signal.
- For performing the home return for the pulse output CH1 with deviation counter clear, the
above Y7 should be set to the normal output to use Y7 for the deviation counter clear signal.
- The home return cannot be performed for the pulse output CH2 with deviation counter clear.
Note4) C32/T32/F32 type:
When performing theo home return with deviation counter clear, the deviation counter clear
signals corresponding to each CH are used fixedly as follows; CH0=Y8, CH1=Y9, CH2=YA,
CH3=YB
For performing the home return for each type,
it is necessary to specify the home input corresponding to each channel to be used for the home
return in the system register 401.
Home input corresponding to each channel: CH0=4, CH1=X5, CH2=X6, CH3=X7
For performing the JOG positioning for each type,
it is necessary to specify the position control starting input signal corresponding to each channel
to be used for the JOG positioning.
Note3) The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 to
405.

15-8
 FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Communication Computer link
Computer link
mode setting General-purpose communications Note2)
412
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
“with odd”
Tool system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
port “General-purpose serial communication”.
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None
set-
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
ting
Communication 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps /
setting 115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
420 4096 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
421 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Computer link
Communication General-purpose serial communication
Computer link
mode setting PC(PLC) link
412
MODBUS RTU
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
COM format setting the communication mode specified by
Odd
port system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
set- “General-purpose serial communication”.
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
ting
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
Communication 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps /
setting 115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
416 0 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
Note1) The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings:
Data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
Note2) The general-purpose communication with the tool port is available only in RUN mode. In PROG
mode, the computer link mode must be used regardless of settings.

15-9
 FP0R
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Controller input time
430 constant setting 1
X0 to X3 None
Cont- Controller input time 0.1 ms
roller 431 constant setting 1 0.5 ms
input X4 to X7 1 ms
time Controller input time 2 ms
1 ms
cons- constant setting 2 4 ms
tant 432 8 ms
X8 to XB
set- (C32/T32/F32) 16 ms
tings Controller input time 32 ms
constant setting 2 64 ms
433
XC to XF
(C32/T32/F32)
Note) X6 and X7 is invalid for C10.

15-10
15.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0R
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.

WR900 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Self-diagnostic Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000
error flag ⇒ The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in DT90000.
R9001 Not used
R9002 Not used
R9003 Not used
I/O verification
R9004 Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.
error flag
R9005 Not used
R9006 Not used
Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error occurs.
Operation error
R9007 ⇒The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017.
flag (hold)
(indicates the first operation error which occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error
R9008 ⇒The address where the operation error occurred is stored in
flag (non-hold)
DT90018. The contents change each time a new error occurs.
This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation
R9009 Carry flag
results, and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger
R900A > Flag
in the comparison instructions (F60 to F63).
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions (F60 to F63).
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller
R900C < Flag
in the comparison instructions (F60 to F63).
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in the
Auxiliary timer timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM) auxiliary timer
R900D
instruction flag instruction. The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer
instruction turns off.
Tool port
R900E communication Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred.
error
Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system
Constant scan
R900F register 34 during constant scan execution.
error flag
This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

15-11
WR901 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.
Initial (on type) Goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been
R9013
pulse relay started, and goes off for the second and subsequent scans.
Initial (off type) Goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been
R9014
pulse relay started, and goes on for the second and subsequent scans.
Step ladder initial
Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the
R9015 pulse relay (on
step ladder control.
type)
R9016 Not used
R9017 Not used
0.01 s clock Repeats on/off operations in
R9018
pulse relay 0.01 sec. cycles.

0.02 s clock Repeats on/off operations in

R9019
pulse relay 0.02 s. cycles.

0.1 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.1

R901A
relay s. cycles.

0.2 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.2

R901B
relay s. cycles.

1 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1 s.

R901C
relay cycles.

2 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 2 s.

R901D
relay cycles.

1 min clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1

R901E
relay min. cycles.
R901F Not used
A: Available, N/A: Not available

15-12
WR902 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 Not used
R9022 Not used
R9023 Not used
R9024 Not used
R9025 Not used
R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
R9027 Not used
R9028 Not used
Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output relay
R9029 Forcing flag
timer/counter contacts.
Interrupt enable Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL
R902A
flag instruction.
Interrupt error
R902B Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
flag
Sampling by the instruction=0
R902C Sample point flag
Sampling at constant time intervals=1
Sample trace end When the sampling operation stops=1,
R902D
flag When the sampling operation starts=0
Sampling stop When the sampling stop trigger activates=1
R902E
trigger flag When the sampling stop trigger stops=0
Sampling enable When sampling starts=1
R902F
flag When sampling stops=0
A: Available, N/A: Not available

15-13
WR903 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
R9030 Not used
R9031 Not used
- Turns on when the general-purpose communication function
COM port
is being used
R9032 communication mode
- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL-COM or the PLC link
flag
function is being used.
Print instruction Off: Printing is not executed.
R9033
execution flag On: Execution is in progress.
RUN overwrite Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a rewrite
R9034
complete flag during the RUN operation.
R9035 Not used
R9036 Not used
- Goes on is a transmission error occurs during data
COM port
communication.
R9037 communication error
- Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the
flag
F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM port reception
done flag during - Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R9038
general purpose purpose serial communication.
communication
COM port
- Goes on when transmission has been completed in general-
transmission done
purpose serial communication.
R9039 flag during general-
- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose
purpose serial
serial communication.
communication
R903A Not used
R903B Not used
R903C Not used
R903D Not used
TOOL port reception
done flag during - Turns on the terminator is received during general -purpose
R903E
general purpose serial communication.
communication
TOOL port
- Goes on when transmission has been completed in general-
transmission done
purpose serial communication.
R903F flag during general-
- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose
purpose serial
serial communication.
communication
A: Available, N/A: Not available
Note) R9030 to R9030F can be changed during 1 scan.

15-14
WR904 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
TOOL port - Turns on when the general-purpose communication function is being
R9040 operation mode used
flag - Goes off when the computer link function is being used.
COM port PLC
R9041 Turn on while the PLC link function is used.
link flag
R9042 Not used
R9043 Not used
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions can
COM port
be executed or not.
SEND/RECV
R9044 Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed.
instruction
(During executing the instruction)
execution flag
On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed.
COM port Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of
SEND/RECV the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions as follows:
R9045 instruction Off: No abonormality detected.
execution end On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
flag End code: DT90124
R9046 Not used
R9047 Not used
R9048 Not used
R9049 Not used
R904A Not used
R904B Not used
R904C
Not used
to R904F
A: Available, N/A: Not available
Note) R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan.
WR905 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
MEWNET-W0
When using MEWNET-W0
PLC link
R9050 - Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PLC link.
transmission
- Turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings.
error flag
R9051 to
Not used
R905F

15-15
WR906 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9060 No.1 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9061 No.2 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9062 No.3 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9063 No.4 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9064 No.5 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9065 No.6 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9066 No.7 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
MEWNET- occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9067 PC(PLC) No.8 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
link 0 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
trans- Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9068 mission Unit link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
assurance No.9 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
relay Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in
R9069 Unit PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
No.10 an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in
R906A No.11 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in
R906B No.12 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in
R906C No.13 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in
R906D No.14 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in
R906E No.15 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in
R906F No.16 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

15-16
WR907 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9070
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
R9071
No.2 Turns off when Unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R9072
No.3 Turns off when Unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R9073
No.4 Turns off when Unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode.
R9074
No.5 Turns off when Unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode.
R9075
No.6 Turns off when Unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode.
R9076
MEWNET- No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9077
PC(PLC) No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
link 0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9078
operation No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
mode relay Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9079
No.10 Turns off when Unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R907A
No.11 Turns off when Unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R907B
No.12 Turns off when Unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R907C
No.13 Turns off when Unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R907D
No.14 Turns off when Unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R907E
No.15 Turns off when Unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R907F
No.16 Turns off when Unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

15-17
WR908 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9080 No.1 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9081 No.2 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9082 No.3 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9083 No.4 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9084 No.5 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9085 No.6 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9086 No.7 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
MEWNET- occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9087 PC(PLC) No.8 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
link 1 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
trans- Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9088 mission Unit link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
assurance No.9 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
relay Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9089 Unit link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
No.10 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908A No.11 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908B No.12 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908C No.13 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908D No.14 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908E No.15 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R908F No.16 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

15-18
WR909 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9090
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
R9091
No.2 Turns off when Unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R9092
No.3 Turns off when Unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R9093
No.4 Turns off when Unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode.
R9094
No.5 Turns off when Unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode.
R9095
No.6 Turns off when Unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode.
R9096
MEWNET- No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9097
PC(PLC) No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
link 1 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9098
operation No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
mode relay Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9099
No.10 Turns off when Unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R909A
No.11 Turns off when Unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R909B
No.12 Turns off when Unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R909C
No.13 Turns off when Unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R909D
No.14 Turns off when Unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R909E
No.15 Turns off when Unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R909F
No.16 Turns off when Unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode.
A: Available, N/A: Not available

15-19
WR910 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
R9110 HSC-CH0
- Turns on the channel of high-speed counter during the
R9111 HSC-CH1
High-speed control using F165(CAM0), F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R),
R9112 HSC-CH2
counter F178(PLSM) instructions.
R9113 HSC-CH3
control flag - Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is
R9114 HSC-CH4
completed.
R9115 HSC-CH5
R9116 to
Not used
R911F
R9120 PLS-CH0
Pulse output - Turns on while the pulses are being output using
R9121 PLS-CH1
instruction F171(SPDH), F172 (PLSH), F173(PWMH), F174 (SP0H),
R9122 PLS-CH2
flag F175(SPSH), F177(HOME) instructions.
R9123 PLS-CH3
R9124 to
Not used
R912F
R9130 PLS-CH0 - Turns on the channel of pulse output during the control
R9131 Pulse output PLS-CH1 using F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R) instructions.
R9132 control flag PLS-CH2 - Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is
R9133 PLS-CH3 completed.
R9134 to
Not used
R913F
A: Available, N/A: Not available

15-20
15.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0R
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Self-diagnostic error The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
DT90000 A N/A
code when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
DT90001 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90002 Not used N/A N/A
DT90003 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90004 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90005 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90006 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90007 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90008 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90009 Not used - N/A N/A
When the state of installation of FP0
expansion I/O unit has changed since the
power was turned on, the bit corresponding to
Extension (right side) the unit No. will turn on. Monitor using binary
DT90010 I/O verify error unit display. A N/A
[0 to 3]

DT90011 Not used - N/A N/A

DT90012 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90013 Not used - N/A N/A

15-21
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction,
DT90014 register for data shift F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) is executed. The A A
instruction value can be read and written by executing F0
(MV) instruction.

The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in

DT90015 DT90015 when the division instruction F32(%) A A
or F52(B%) instruction is executed. The
Operation auxiliary
divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in
register for division
DT90015 and DT90016 when the division
instruction
instruction F33(D%) or F53(DB%) is
DT90016 executed. The value can be read and written A A
by executing F0(MV) instruction.

After commencing operation, the address

Operation error where the first operation error occurred is
DT90017 A N/A
address (hold type) stored. Monitor the address using decimal
display.
The address where an operation error
Operation error occurred is stored. Each time an error occurs,
DT90018 A N/A
address (latest type) the new address overwrites the previous
address.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
2.5 ms ring counter
DT90019 Note1) Difference between the values of the two A N/A
points (absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed
time between the two points.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 10.67 μs. (H0 to HFFFF)
10 μs ring counter Difference between the values of the two
DT90020 Note1) Note2) A N/A
points (absolute value) x 10.67 μs = Elapsed
time between the two points.
Note) The exact value is 10.67 μs.
DT90021 Not used - N/A N/A
Note1) It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan.
Note2) As DT90020 is renewed even if F0(MV), DT90020 and D instruction is being executed, it can be
used to measure the block time.

15-22
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
The current scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (current
DT90022 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (minimum
DT90023 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
scan time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (maximum
DT90024 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using the
instruction can be stored here. Monitor using
Mask condition binary display.
monitoring register
DT90025 A N/A
for interrupts
(INT0 to 11)

DT90026 Not used - N/A N/A

The value set by ICTL instruction is stored.
Periodical interrupt
DT90027 K0: periodical interrupt is not used. A N/A
interval (INT24)
K1 to K3000: 0.5ms to 1.5s or 10ms to 30s
K0: Sampling by the SMPL instruction
DT90028 Sample trace interval A N/A
K1 to K3000 (x 10 ms): 10 ms to 30 s
DT90029 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90030
DT90031 The contents of the specified message (Data
DT90032 Character storage by length) are stored in these special data
A N/A
DT90033 F149 MSG instruction registers when F149 (MSG) instruction is
DT90034 executed.
DT90035
DT90036 Not used - N/A N/A
Note) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. (In PROG.
mode, the scan time for the operation is not displayed.) The maximum and minimum values are
cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG.

15-23
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
The number of data that match the searched
Work1 for SRC
DT90037 data is stored here when F96 (SRC) A N/A
instructions
insturction is executed.
The position of the first matching data is
Work2 for SRC
DT90038 stored here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is A N/A
instructions
executed.
DT90039 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90040 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90041 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90042 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90043 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90044 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90045 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90046 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90047 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90048 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90049 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90050 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90051 Not used - N/A N/A
The pulse output instruction can be continued
or cleared by writing a value with MV
instruction (F0).
Control code setting

High-speed counter
DT90052 A A
control flag

15-24
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.

Control code setting

Pulse output control

DT90052 A A
flag

15-25
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Hour and minute data of the clock/calender
are stored here. This data is read-only data. It
cannot be overwritten.
Clock/calender
DT90053 monitor (hour/minute) A N/A
(T32 only)

The year, month, day, hour, minute, second

Clock/calender setting and day-of-the-week data for the
DT90054 (minute/second) clock/calender is stored. The built-in
(T32 only) clock/calender will operate correctly through
the year 2099 and supports leap years. The
Clock/calender setting clock/calender can be set by writing a value
DT90055 (day/hour) using a programming tool software or a
(T32 only) program that uses the F0 (MV) instruction.(see
example for DT90058)
Clock/calender setting
DT90056 (year/month) A A
(T32 only)

Clock/calender setting
DT90057 (day-of-the-week)
(T32 only)
As a day of the week is not automatially set on
FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set
each value for 00 to 06.

15-26
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
The clock/calender is adjusted as follows.
When setting the clock/calender by
program
By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
time becomes that written to DT90054 to
DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the
time is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot
be performed with any instruction other than
F0 (MV) instruction.)

<Example>
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when
the X0 turns on.

Note) If the values of DT90054 to DT90057

Clock/calender setting are changed with the programming tool
and 30 seconds software, the time will be set when the new
DT90058 A A
correction register values are written. Therefore, it is
(T32 only) unnecessary to write to DT90058.

When the correcting times less than 30

seconds
By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
value will be moved up or down and become
exactly 0 seconds. After the correction is
completed, DT90058 is cleared to 0.

Example:
Correct to 0 seconds with X0: on

At the time of coorection, if between 0 and 29

seconds, it will be moved down, and if
between 30 and 59 seconds, it will be moved
up.
In the example above, if the time was 5
minutes 29 seconds, it will become 5 minutes
0 seconds;and, if the time was 5 minutes 35
seconds, it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds.
Communication error Error code is sotred here when a
DT90059 N/A N/A
code communication error occurs.

15-27
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90060
(0 to 15)
Step ladder process
DT90061
(16 to 31)
Step ladder process
DT90062
(32 to 47)
Step ladder process
DT90063
(48 to 63)
Step ladder process
DT90064
(64 to 79)
Step ladder process
DT90065
(80 to 95)
Step ladder process
DT90066
(96 to 111)
Step ladder process
DT90067
(112 to 127)
Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process
DT90068 ladder process. When the process starts up,
(128 to 143)
the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process
DT90069 turns on.
(144 to 159)
Step ladder process
DT90070 Monitor using binary display.
(160 to 175) A
A Note)
Step ladder process
DT90071
(176 to 191)
Step ladder process
DT90072
(192 to 207)
Step ladder process
DT90073 Note) A programming tool software can be
(208 to 223)
used to write data.
Step ladder process
DT90074
(224 to 239)
Step ladder process
DT90075
(240 to 255)
Step ladder process
DT90076
(256 to 271)
Step ladder process
DT90077
(272 to 287)
Step ladder process
DT90078
(288 to 303)
Step ladder process
DT90079
(304 to 319)
Step ladder process
DT90080
(320 to 335)
Step ladder process
DT90081
(336 to 351)

15-28
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90082
(352 to 367)
Step ladder process
DT90083
(368 to 383)
Step ladder process
DT90084
(384 to 399)
Step ladder process
DT90085
(400 to 415)
Step ladder process
DT90086
(416 to 431)
Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process
DT90087 ladder process. When the process starts up,
(432 to 447)
the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process
DT90088 turns on .
(448 to 463)
Step ladder process
DT90089 Monitor using binary display.
(464 to 479) A
A Note)
Step ladder process
DT90090
(480 to 495)
Step ladder process
DT90091
(496 to 511)
Step ladder process
DT90092 Note) A programming tool software can be
(512 to 527)
used to write data.
Step ladder process
DT90093
(528 to 543)
Step ladder process
DT90094
(544 to 559)
Step ladder process
DT90095
(560 to 575)
Step ladder process
DT90096
(576 to 591)
Step ladder process
DT90097
(592 to 607)

15-29
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90098
(608 to 623)
Step ladder process
DT90099
(624 to 639)
Step ladder process
DT90100
(640 to 655)
Step ladder process
DT90101
(656 to 671)
Step ladder process
DT90102
(672 to 687)
Step ladder process
DT90103
(688 to 703)
Step ladder process
DT90104
(704 to 719)
Step ladder process
DT90105
(720 to 735)
Step ladder process
DT90106
(736 to 751)
Step ladder process
DT90107 Indicates the startup condition of the step
(752 to 767)
Step ladder process
ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90108 the bit corresponding to the process number
(768 to 783)
Step ladder process turns on.
DT90109
(784 to 799)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display
DT90110
(800 to 815)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90111
(816 to 831)
Step ladder process
DT90112
(832 to 847)
Step ladder process
DT90113
(848 to 863)
A programming tool software can be used to
Step ladder process
DT90114 write data.
(864 to 879)
Step ladder process
DT90115
(880 to 895)
Step ladder process
DT90116
(896 to 911)
Step ladder process
DT90117
(912 to 927)
Step ladder process
DT90118
(928 to 943)
Step ladder process
DT90119
(944 to 959)
Step ladder process
DT90120
(960 to 975)
Step ladder process
DT90121
(976 to 991)
Step ladder process
DT90122 (992 to 999)
(higher byte is not used.)

15-30
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90123 Not used - N/A N/A
COM SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90124 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
DT90125 Not used - N/A N/A
Forced ON/OFF
DT90126 operating station Used by the system N/A N/A
display
DT90127
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90139
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90140
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90141
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90142
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90143
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90144
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90145
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90146
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90147
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90148
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90149
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90150
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90151
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90152
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90153
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90154
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90155
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90156
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90157
interval.

15-31
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90158
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90159
interval.
MEWNET-W0
DT90160 Stores the unit No. of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 unit No.
MEWNET-W0
DT90161 PC(PLC) link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
flag
DT90162
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90169
Duplicated destination for PC(PLC) inter-link
DT90170
address
DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost.
Counts how many times two or more tokens
DT90172
are detected.
DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost.
No. of times underfined commands have
DT90174
been received.
MEWNET-W0
No. of times sum check errors have occurred A N/A
DT90175 PC(PLC) link 0 status
during reception.
No. of times format errors have occurred in
DT90176
received data.
No. of times transmission errors have
DT90177
occurred.
DT90178 No. of times procedural errors have occurred.
No. of times overlapping parent units have
DT90179
occurred.
DT90180
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90189
DT90190 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90191 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90192 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90193 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90194
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90218

15-32
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Unit No. (Station No.)
0: Unit No. (Station No.) 1 to 8,
DT90219 selection for DT90220 to A A
1: Unit No. (Station No.) 9 to 16
DT90251
System regis-
DT90220
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90221 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis- The contents of the system register settings
DT90222 (station)
ter 44 and 45 partaining to the PLC inter-link function for
No. 1 or 9
System regis- the various unit numbers are stored as
DT90223
ter 46 and 47 shown below.
System regis-
DT90224
ter 40 and 41 <Example>
PC(PLC)
System regis- When DT90219 is 0
DT90225 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90226 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 2 or 10
System regis-
DT90227
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90228
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90229 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit A N/A
System regis- • When the system register 46 in the home
DT90230 (station)
ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting, the values in
No. 3 or 11
System regis- the home unit are copied in the system
DT90231
ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47.
System regis- When the system register 46 in the home
DT90232
ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting, the registers
PC(PLC)
System regis- 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the
DT90233 link
ter 42 and 43 home unit mentioned in the left column will
Unit
System regis- be changed to 50 to 55 and 57, and the
DT90234 (station)
ter 44 and 45 system register 46 will be set as it is.
No. 4 or 12
System regis- Also, the system registers 40 to 45
DT90235 corresponding to other units will be
ter 46 and 47
System regis- changed to the values which the received
DT90236 values are corrected, and the registers 46
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC) and 57 in the home unit are set for the
System regis-
DT90237 link registers 46 and 47.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90238 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 5 or 13
System regis-
DT90239
ter 46 and 47

15-33
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
System regis- The contents of the system register
DT90240
ter 40 and 41 settings partaining to the PLC inter-link
PC(PLC) System regis-
function for the various unit numbers are
DT90241 link stored as shown below.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
(station) System regis- <Example> when DT90219 is 0.
DT90242
No. 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45

System regis-
DT90243
ter 46 and 47

System regis-
DT90244
ter 40 and 41

PC(PLC) System regis-

DT90245 link ter 42 and 43
• When the system register 46 in the
Unit (sta- home unit is in the standard setting, the A N/A
tion) No. 7 System regis- values in the home unit are copied in
DT90246
or 15 ter 44 and 45 the system registers 46 and 47.
When the system register 46 in the
System regis- home unit is in the reverse setting, the
DT90247
ter 46 and 47 registers 40 to 45 and 47
System regis-
corresponding to the home unit
DT90248 mentioned in the left column will be
ter 40 and 41
changed to 50 to 55 and 57, and the
PC(PLC) System regis- system register 46 will be set as it is.
DT90249 link ter 42 and 43 Also, the system registers 40 to 45
Unit (sta- corresponding to other units will be
tion) No. 8 System regis- changed to the values which the
DT90250
or 16 ter 44 and 45 received values are corrected, and the
System regis-
registers 46 and 57 in the home unit
DT90251 are set for the registers 46 and 47.
ter 46 and 47

DT90252 Not used

DT90253 Not used
N/A N/A
DT90254 Not used
DT90255 Not used
DT90256 Not used N/A N/A

15-34
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for input (X0) or
DT90300 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(X0, X1) of the main unit.
value
DT90301 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH0
The target value is set when
DT90302 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90303 area Higher words A A Note)

Counting area for input (X1) of

DT90304 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
the main unit.
value
DT90305 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH1
The target value is set when
DT90306 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90307 area Higher words A A Note)

Counting area for input (X2) or

DT90308 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(X2, X3) of the main unit.
value
DT90309 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH2
The target value is set when
DT90310 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90311 area Higher words A A Note)

Counting area for input (X3) of

DT90312 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
the main unit.
value
DT90313 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH3
The target value is set when
DT90314 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90315 area Higher words A A Note)

Counting area for input (X4) or

DT90316 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(X4, X5) of the main unit.
value
DT90317 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH4
The target value is set when
DT90318 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90319 area Higher words A A Note)

Note) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.

15-35
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for input (X5) of A
DT90320 Elapsed Lower words A Note1)
value the main unit.
A
DT90321 area Higher words A Note1)
HSC-CH5
The target value is set when A
DT90322 Target Lower words A Note1)
value instructions F166 (HC1S) and
F167 (HC1R) are executed. A
DT90323 area Higher words A Note1)

DT90324 Not used N/A N/A

DT90325 Not used N/A N/A
DT90326 Not used N/A N/A
DT90327 Not used N/A N/A
DT90328 Not used N/A N/A
DT90329 Not used N/A N/A
DT90330 Not used N/A N/A
DT90331 Not used N/A N/A
DT90332 Not used N/A N/A
DT90333 Not used N/A N/A
DT90334 Not used N/A N/A
DT90335 Not used N/A N/A
DT90336 Not used N/A N/A
DT90337 Not used N/A N/A
DT90338 Not used N/A N/A
DT90339 Not used N/A N/A
DT90340 Not used N/A N/A
DT90341 Not used N/A N/A
DT90342 Not used N/A N/A
DT90343 Not used N/A N/A
DT90344 Not used N/A N/A
DT90345 Not used N/A N/A
DT90346 Not used N/A N/A
DT90347 Not used N/A N/A
DT90348 Not used N/A N/A
DT90349 Not used N/A N/A
DT90350 Not used N/A N/A
DT90351 Not used N/A N/A
DT90352 Not used N/A N/A
DT90353 Not used N/A N/A
DT90354 Not used N/A N/A
DT90355 Not used N/A N/A
DT90356 Not used N/A N/A
DT90357 Not used N/A N/A
DT90358 Not used N/A N/A
DT90359 Not used N/A N/A
DT90360 Not used N/A N/A
DT90361 Not used N/A N/A
DT90362 Not used N/A N/A
DT90363 Not used N/A N/A
Note1) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.

15-36
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90370 HSC-CH0 When HSC control is executed by A N/A
DT90371 HSC-CH1 F0 (MV)S, DT90052 instruction, A N/A
DT90372 Control flag monitor HSC-CH2 the setting value for the target CH A N/A
DT90373 area HSC-CH3 is stored in each CH. A N/A
DT90374 HSC-CH4 A N/A
DT90375 HSC-CH5 A N/A
DT90376 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90377 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90378 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90379 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90380 PLS-CH0 When pulse output control is A N/A
Control flag monitor
DT90381 PLS-CH1 executed by F0 (MV)S, DT90052 A N/A
area (Transistor
DT90382 PLS-CH2 instruction, the setting value for the A N/A
output type only)
DT90383 PLS-CH3 target CH is stored in each CH. A N/A
DT90384 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90385 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90386 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90387 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90388 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90389 Not used - N/A N/A

15-37
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90400 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90401 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90402 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90403 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90404 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90405 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90406 speed of initial CH0 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90407 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90408 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90409 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.
DT90410 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90411 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90412 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90413 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90414 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90415 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90416 speed of initial CH1 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90417 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90418 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90419 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.

15-38
 FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90420 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90421 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90422 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90423 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90424 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90425 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90426 speed of initial CH2 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90427 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90428 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90429 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.
DT90430 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90431 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90432 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90433 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90434 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90435 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90436 speed of initial CH3 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90437 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90438 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90439 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.

15-39
15.2 Table of Basic Instructions

FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps *3

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description

Sequence basic instructions

Start Begins a logic operation with a Form A 1
ST
(normally open) contact. (2)
Start Not Begins a logic operation with a Form B 1
ST/
(normally closed) contact. (2)
Out Outputs the operated result to the specified 1
OT
output. (2)
Not Inverts the operated result up to this
/ 1
instruction.
AND Connects a Form A (normally open) contact 1
AN
serially. (2)
AND Not Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact 1
AN/
serially. (2)
OR Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in 1
OR
parallel. (2)
OR Not Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact 1
OR/
in parallel. (2)
Leading Begins a logic operation only for one scan
edge ST↑ when the leading edge of the trigger is 2 *2 *2
start detected.
Trailing Begins a logic operation only for one scan
edge ST↓ when the trailing edge of the trigger is 2 *2 *2
start detected.
Leading Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge AN↑ serially only for one scan when the leading 2 *2 *2
AND edge of the trigger is detected.
Trailing Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge AN↓ serially only for one scan when the trailing 2 *2 *2
AND edge of the trigger is detected.
Leading Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
edge OR OR↑ parallel only for one scan when the leading 2 *2 *2
edge of the trigger is detected.
Trailing Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
edge OR OR↓ parallel only for one scan when the trailing 2 *2 *2
edge of the trigger is detected.
Leading Outputs the operated result to the specified
edge out OT↑ output only for one scan when leading edge of 2
the trigger is detected. (for pulse relay)
Trailing Outputs the operated result to the specified
edge out OT↓ output only for one scan when trailing edge of 2
the trigger is detected. (for pulse relay)
Alterna- ALT Inverts the output condition (on/off) each time
3
tive out the leading edge of the trigger is detected.
AND ANS Connects the multiple instruction blocks
serially. 1
stack
OR stack ORS Connects the multiple instruction blocks in
parallel. 1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

*1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.
*3) In the FP2/FP2SH/10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280, T256, C256 or
anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and OR/ instructions, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.
Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in
parentheses. For the FPΣ and FP-X, the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used.

15-40
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps *5 *6

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description

Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this

1
instruction. *2
Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by the
1
PSHS instruction. *2
Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result
1
stored by the PSHS instruction
Leading edge DF Turns on the contact for only one scan
differential when the leading edge of the trigger is 1
detected.
Trailing edge DF/ Turns on the contact for only one scan
differential when the trailing edge of the trigger is 1
detected.
Leading edge DFI Turns on the contact for only one scan
differ-ential when the leading edge of the trigger is
detected. The leading edge detection is 1
(initial execution
type) possible on the first scan.
Set SET Output is set to and held at on.
3

Reset RST Output is set to and held at off.

3

Keep KP Outputs at set trigger and holds until 1

reset trigger turns on. (2)
No operation NOP No operation. 1
Basic function instructions
On-delay timer TML After set value “n” x 0.001 seconds, 3
timer contact “a” is set to on. (4) *3
TMR After set value “n” x 0.01 seconds, timer 3
contact “a” is set to on. (4) *3
TMX After set value “n” x 0.1 seconds, timer 3
contact “a” is set to on. (4) *3
TMY After set value “n” x 1 second, timer 4
contact “a” is set to on. (5) *3
Auxiliary timer F137 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds, the
(16-bit) (STMR) specified output and R900D are set to 5
on.
Auxiliary timer F183 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds, the
(32-bit) (DSTM) specified output and R900D are set to 7
on.
Time constant F182 Executes the filter processing for the
processing specified input. 9 *4 *4

Counter CT Decrements from the preset value “n”

3
(4) *3 *3 *3

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

*1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models.
*2) The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models.
*3) For FP2SH, FP10SH and FP-X Ver2.0 or later, any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction.
*4) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later.
*5) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280 or anything beyond for the
KP instruction, the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has
an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.
*6) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when timer 256 or higher, or counter 255 or lower, is used, the number of steps is the number
in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses. For the FPΣ and FP-X, the number of steps varies according to the
specified timer number or counter number.

15-41
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description

UP/DOWN F118 Increments or decrements from the

counter (UDC) preset value “S” based on up/donw
input. 5

Shift SR Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal

register relay (WR)] data to the left. 1
(2)
*1

Left/right F119 Shifts one bit of 16-bit data range

shift (LRSR) specified by “D1” and “D2” to the left or
register to the right. 5

Control instructions
Master MC Starts the master control program.
control 2
relay
Master MCE Ends the master control program.
control 2
relay end
Jump JP The program jumps to the label 2
instruction and continues from there. (3)
*2

Label LBL 1
Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label
3
jump (SJP) instruction specified by “S” and
continues from there.
1
Label LBL
Loop LOOP The program jumps to the label 4
instruction and continues from there (the (5)
number of jumps is set in “S”). *3
Label LBL
1
Break BRK Stops program execution when the
predetermined trigger turns on in the 1
TEST/RUN mode only.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when internal relay WR240 or higher is used, the number of steps is the number in
parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the specified internal relay number (word address has an index
modfier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.
*2) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a jump instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps
isthenumber in parentheses.
*3) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a loop instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps is the
number in parentheses.

15-42
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description

End ED The operation of program is ended.

1
Indicates the end of a main program.
Conditional CNDE The operation of program is ended when
1
end the trigger turns on.
Eject EJECT Adds page break fo ruse when printing.
1

Step ladder instructions

Start step SSTP The start of program “n” for process
3
control
Next step NSTL Start the specified process “n” and clear
the
3
process currently started. (Scan
execution type)
NSTP Start the specified process “n” and clear
the
3
process currently started. (Pulse
execution type)
Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process “n”.
3
Clear multi- SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by
ple steps “n1” 5
and “n2”.
Step end STPE End of step ladder area
1
Subroutine instructions
Subroutine CALL When the trigger is on: Executes the 2
call subroutine. (3)
When the trigger is off: Not execute the *1
subroutine. The output in the
subroutine is maintained.
Output off FCAL When the trigger is on: Executes the
type subroutine. 4
subroutine When the trigger is off: Not execute the (5)
call subroutine. But, the output in *1
the subroutine is cleared.
Subroutine SUB Indicates the start of the subroutine
1
entry program “n”.
Subroutine RET Ends the subroutine program.
1
return
Interrupt instructions
Interrupt INT Indicates the start of the interrupt program
1
“n”.
Interrupt IRET Ends the interrupt program.
1
return
Interrupt ICTL Select interrupt enable/disable or clear in
5
control “S1” and “S2” and execute.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” of a subroutine program has an index modifier, the number of steps is
the number in parentheses.

15-43
 FP0 (FP0R mode)

FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP-X
FP-e

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description

Special setting instructions

Communica- SYS1 Change the communication conditions
tion condi- for the
tions setting COM port or tool port based on the
*1 *1
contents specified by the character
constant.
Password Change the password specified by the
setting PLC based on the contents specified by *2 *2
the character constant.
Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the
setting contents specified by the character
constant.
PLC link time Set the system setting time when a PLC
13
setting link is used, based on the contents
specified by the character constant.
MEWTOCOL- Change the communication conditions of
COM the COM. port or tool port for
response MEWTOCOL-COM
control based on the contents specified by the
character constant.
High-speed Change the operation mode of the high-
counter speed counter, based on the contents
operation specified by the character constant.
*3 *3
mode
changing
System SYS2 Change the setting value of the system
registers register for the PLC link function.
“No. 40 to 7
No. 47”
changing
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) With FP-X Ver2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver 3.10 or later, the baud rate can be selected from 300, 600 or 1200 bps.
*2) With FPΣ 32k type, the 8-digit password can be selected.
*3) With FPΣ 32k type and FP-X Ver1.10 or later, it can be used.

15-44
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description

Data compare instructions

16-bit ST= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”.
data
ST<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
compare bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” 5
(Start) or “S1>S2”.
ST> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”.
ST>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2” 5
or “S1=S2”.
ST< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”.
ST<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” 5
or “S1=S2”.
16-bit AN= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
data
comparative condition “S1=S2”.
compare Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
AN<>
(AND) serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.
AN> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1>S2”.
AN>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.
AN< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2”.
AN<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.
16-bit OR= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
data
comparative condition “S1=S2”.
compare Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
OR<>
(OR) parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.
OR> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1>S2”.
OR>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.
OR< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2”.
OR<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

15-45
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description

32-bit STD= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
data S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare STD<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
(Start)
S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
STD> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
STD>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
STD< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
STD<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
32-bit AND= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
data comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare AND<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the
(AND) 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
AND> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
AND>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
AND< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
AND<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
32-bit ORD= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
data comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare ORD<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the
(OR) 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

15-46
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description

Floating STF= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
point S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

type real STF<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
number S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
data STF> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
compare *1 *1
S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
(Start) Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
STF>=
bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

STF< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

STF<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

Floating ANF= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
point comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

type real ANF<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the
number 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
data or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ANF> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
compare
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
(AND) comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

ANF>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ANF< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

ANF<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
Floating ORF= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
point comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

type real ORF<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in

parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the
number 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
data or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORF> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
compare
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
(OR) comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

ORF>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in

parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ORF< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1

ORF<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in

parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.10 or later and FPΣ 32k type

15-47
15.3 Table of High-level Instructions
The high-level instructions are expressed by the prefixes “F” or “P” with numbers. For most of the high-level
instructions, “F” and “P” types are available. The differences between the two types are explained as follows:
- Instructions with the prefix “F” are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on.
- Instructions with the prefix “P” are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected.
For the FP0/FP0R/FPΣ/FP-X, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Boo- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand

Data transfer instructions

F0 16-bit data MV S, D (S)→(D)
5
P0 move PMV
F1 32-bit data DMV S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P1 move PDMV
F2 16-bit data MV S, D
P2 invert and PMV/ (S)→(D) 5
move
F3 32-bit data DMV/ S, D
P3 invert and PDMV/ (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
move
F4 Reading of GETS S, D The head word No. of the specified slot is
P4 head word PGETS read.
5
No. of the *1 *1
specified slot
F5 Bit data BTM S, n, The specified one bit in “S” is transferred to
P5 move PBTM D the specified one bit in “D”. The bit is 7
specified by “n”.
F6 Hexadecimal DGT S, n, d The specified one digit in “S” is transferred
P6 digit (4-bit) PDGT to the specified one digit in “D”. The digit is 7
data move specified by “n”.
F7 Two 16-bit MV2 S1, (S1)→(D),
7
P7 data move PMV2 S2, D (S2)→(D+1)
F8 Two 32-bit DMV2 S1, (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D),
11
P8 data move PDMV2 S2, D (S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2)
F10 Block move BKMV S1, The data between “S1” and “S2” is
7
P10 PBKMV S2, D transferred to the area starting at “D”.
F11 Block copy COPY S, D1, The data of “S” is transferred to the all area
7
P11 PCOPY D2 between “D1” and “D2”.
F12 Data read ICRD S1, The data stored in the expansion memory
from EEP- S2, D of the EEP-ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
*2
ROM are transferred to the area startign at “D”.
P13 Data write to PICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
11
EEP-ROM S2, D transferred to the EEP-ROM starting at “D”. *2
F12 Data read ICRD S1, The data stored in the expansion memory
from F-ROM S2, D of the F-ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
are transferred to the area startign at “D”.
P13 Data write to PICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
11
F-ROM S2, D transferred to the F-ROM starting at “D”.
F12 Data read ICRD S1, The data stored in the expansion memory
P12 from IC card PICRD S2, D of the IC card specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
are transferred to the area startign at “D”.
F13 Data write to ICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
P13 IC card PICWT S2, D transferred to the IC card expansion 11
memory area starting at “D”.
F14 Program read PGRD S The program specified using “S” is
P14 from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory 3
memory card card and executes it.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.FP10SH cannot be used
*2) This instruction is available for FP0 Ver. 2.0 or later.

15-48
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boo-lean Description
ber rand

F15 16-bit data XCH D1, D2 (D1)→(D2), (D2)→(D1)

5
P15 exchange PXCH
F16 32-bit data DXCH D1, D2 (D1+1, D1)→(D2+1, D2)
5
P16 exchange PDXCH (D2+1, D2)→(D1+1, D1)
F17 Higher/lower SWAP D The higher byte and lower byte of “D” are
P17 byte in 16-bit PSWAP exchanged. 3
data exchange
F18 16-bit data BXCH D1, Exchange the data between “D1” and “D2”
P18 block PBXCH D2, D3 with the data specified by “D3”. 7
exchange
Control instruction
F19 Auxiliary jump SJP S The program jumps to the label instruction
3
specified by “S” and continues from there.
Binary arithmetic instructions
F20 16-bit data + S, D (D)+(S)→(D)
5
P20 addition P+
F21 32-bit data D+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P21 addition PD+
F22 16-bit data + S1, (S1)+(S2)→(D)
7
P22 addition P+ S2, D
F23 32-bit data D+ S1, (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
11
P23 addition PD+ S2, D
F25 16-bit data - S, D (D)-(S)→(D)
5
P25 subtraction P-
F26 32-bit data D- S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P26 subtraction PD-
F27 16-bit data - S1, (S1)-(S2)→(D)
7
P27 subraction P- S2, D
F28 32-bit data D- S1, (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
11
P28 subtraction PD- S2, D
F30 16-bit data * S1, (S1)X(S2)→(D+1, D)
7
P30 multiplication P* S2, D
F31 32-bit data D* S1, (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2, D+1,
11
P31 multiplication PD* S2, D D)
F32 16-bit data % S1, (S1)÷(S2)→quotient (D)
7
P32 division P% S2, D remainder (DT9015)
F33 32-bit data D% S1, (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→quotient (D+1, D)
11
P33 division PD% S2, D remainder (DT9016, DT9015)
F34 16-bit data *W S1, (S1)X(S2)→(D)
P34 multiplication P*W S2, D
7
(result in 16
bits)
F35 16-bit data +1 D (D)+1→(D)
3
P35 increment P+1
F36 32-bit data D+1 D (D+1, D)+1→(D+1, D)
3
P36 increment PD+1
F37 16-bit data -1 D (D)-1→(D)
3
P37 decrement P-1
F38 32-bit data D-1 D (D+1, D)-1→(D+1, D)
3
P38 decrement PD-1
F39 32-bit data D*D S1, (S1+1, S1)x(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P39 multiplication PD*D S2, D
11
(result in 32
bits)
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

15-49
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boo-lean Description
ber rand

BCD arithmetic instructions

F40 4-digit BCD B+ S, D (D)+(S)→(D)
5
P40 data addition PB+
F41 8-digit BCD DB+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P41 data addition PDB+
F42 4-digit BCD B+ S1, S2, D (S1)+(S2)→(D)
7
P42 data addition PB+
F43 8-digit BCD DB+ S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
11
P43 data addition PDB+
F45 4-digit BCD data B- S, D (D)-(S)→(D)
5
P45 subtraction PB-
F46 8-digit BCD data DB- S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P46 subtraction PDB-
F47 4-digit BCD data B- S1, S2, D (S1)-(S2)→(D)
7
P47 subtraction PB-
F48 8-digit BCD data DB- S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
11
P48 subraction PDB-
F50 4-digit BCD data B* S1, S2, D (S1)X(S2)→(D+1, D)
7
P50 multiplication PB*
F51 8-digit BCD data DB* S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2,
11
P51 multiplication PDB* D+1, D)
F52 4-digit BCD data B% S1, S2, D (S1)÷(S2)→quotient (D)
7
P52 division PB% remainder (DT9015)
F53 8-digit BCD data DB% S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→quotient
P53 division PDB% (D+1, D) 11
remainder (DT9016, DT9015)
F55 4-digit BCD data B+1 D (D)+1→(D)
3
P55 increment PB+1
F56 8-digit BCD data DB+1 D (D+1, D)+1→(D+1, D)
3
P56 increment PDB+1
F57 4-digit BCD data B-1 D (D)-1→(D)
3
P57 decrement PB-1
F58 8-digit BCD data DB-1 D (D+1, D)-1→(D+1, D)
3
P58 decrement PDB-1
Data compare instructions
F60 16-bit data CMP S1, S2 (S1)>(S2)→R900A: on
P60 compare PCMP (S1)=(S2)→R900B: on 5
(S1)<(S2)→R900C: on
F61 32-bit data DCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→R900A: on
P61 compare PDCMP (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→R900B: on 9
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→R900C: on
F62 16-bit data band WIN S1, S2, (S1)>(S3)→R900A: on
P62 compare PWIN S3 (S2)< or=(S1)< or=(S3)→R900B: on 7
(S1)<(S2)→R900C: on
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

15-50
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Boo- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand

F63 32-bit data DWIN S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→R900A: on

P63 band PDWIN S3 (S2+1, S2)< or=(S1+1, S1)< or=(S3+1,
13
compare S3)→R900B: on
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→R900C: on
F64 Block data BCMP S1, S2, Compares the two blocks beginning with
7
P64 compare PBCMP S3 “S2” and “S3” to see if they are equal.
Logic operation instructions
F65 16-bit data WAN S1, S2, D (S1) AND (S2)→(D)
7
P65 AND PWAN
F66 16-bit data WOR S1, S2, D (S1) OR (S2)→(D)
7
P66 OR PWOR
F67 16-bit data XOR S1, S2, D
P67 exclusive PXOR {(S1) AND (S2)} OR {(S1) AND (S2)}→(D) 7
OR
F68 16-bit data XNR S1, S2, D
P68 exclusive PXNR {(S1) AND (S2)} OR {(S1) AND (S2)}→(D) 7
NOR
F69 16-bit data WUNI S1, S2,
P69 unite PWUNI S3, D ([S1] AND [S3]) OR ([S2] AND [S3])→(D)
9
When (S3) is H0, (S2)→(D)
When (S3) is HFFFF, (S1) →(D)
Data conversion instructions
F70 Block check BCC S1, S2, Creates the code for checking the data
P70 code PBCC S3, D specified by “S2” and “S3” and stores it in
calculation “D”. 9
The calculation method is specified by
“S1”.
F71 Hexadecima HEXA S1, S2, D Converts the hexadecimal data specified
P71 l data → PHEXA by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code and stores
ASCII code it in “D”. 7
Example: HABCD→ H 42 41 44 43
B A D C
F72 ASCII code AHEX S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1”
P72 → Hexadeci- PAHEX and “S2” to hexadecimal data and stores
mal data it in “D”. 7
Example: H 44 43 42 41 → HCDAB
D C B A
F73 4-digit BCD BCDA S1, S2, D Converts the four digits of BCD data
P73 data → PBCDA specified by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code
ASCII code and stores it in “D”. 7
Example: H1234→ H 32 31 34 33
2 1 4 3
F74 ASCII code ABCD S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1”
P74 → 4-digit PABCD and “S2” to four digits of BCD data and
BCD data stores it in “D”. 9
Example: H 34 33 32 31 → H3412
4 3 2 1
F75 16-bit binary BINA S1, S2, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data
P75 data → PBINA specified
ASCII code by “S1” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”
7
(area of “S2” bytes).
Example: K-100→ H 30 30 31 2D 20 20
0 0 1 -
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

15-51
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boo-lean Description
ber rand

F76 ASCII code → ABIN S1, S2, Converts the ASCII code specified by
P76 16-bit binary PABIN D “S1” and “S2” to 16 bits of binary data
data and stores it in “D”. 7
Example: H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 → K-100
0 0 1 -
F77 32-bit binary DBIA S1, S2, Converts the 32 bits of binary data
P77 data → ASCII PDBIA D (S1+1,
11
code S1) to ASCII code and stores it in D
(area of “S2” bytes).
F78 ASCII code → DABI S1, S2, Converts the ASCII code specified by
P78 32-bit binary PDABI D “S1” and “S2” to 32 bits of binary data 11
data and stores it in (D+1, D).
F80 16-bit binary BCD S, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data
P80 data → 4-digit PBCD specified by “S” to four digits of BCD
5
BCD data data and stores it in “D”.
Example: K100 → H100
F81 4-digit BCD BIN S, D Converts the four digits of BCD data
P81 data → 16-bit PBIN specified by “S” to 16 bits of binary data
5
binary data and stores it in “D”.
Example: H100 → K100
F82 32-bit binary DBCD S, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data
P82 data → 8-digit PDBCD specified by (S+1, S) to eight digits of
7
BCD data BCD data and stores it in (D+1, D).

F83 8-digit BCD DBIN S, D Converts the eight digits of BCD data
P83 data → 32-bit PDBIN specified by (S+1, S) to 32 bits of binary 7
binary data data and stores it in (D+1, D).
F84 16-bit data INV D Inverts each bit of data of “D”.
P84 invert (com- PINV 3
plement of 1)
F85 16-bit data NEG D Inverts each bit of data of “D” and adds
P85 complement PNEG 1 (inverts the sign). 3
of 2
F86 32-bit data DNEG D Inverts each bit of data of (D+1, D) and
P86 complement PDNEG adds 1 (inverts the sign). 3
of 2
F87 16-bit data ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of
3
P87 absolute PABS “D”.
F88 32-bit data DABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of
3
P88 absolute PDABS (D+1, D).
F89 16-bit data EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in “D” to 32
P89 sign extension PEXT bits in (D+1, D). 3

F90 Decode DECO S, n, D Decodes part of the data of “S” and

P90 PDECO stores 7
it in “D”. The part is specified by “n”.
F91 7-segment SEGT S, D Converts the data of “S” for use in a 7-
P91 decode PSEGT segment display and stores it in (D+1, 5
D).
F92 Encode ENCO S, n, D Encodes part of the data of “S” and
P92 PENCO stores it in “D”. The part is specified by 7
“n”.
F93 16-bit data UNIT S, n, D The least significant digit of each of the
P93 combine PUNIT “n” words of data beginning at “S” are 7
stored (united) in order in “D”.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

15-52
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Boo- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand

F94 16-bit data distribute DIST S, n, Each of the digits of the data of “S”
P94 PDIST D are stored in (distriuted to) the least
7
significant digits of the areas
beginning at “D”.
F95 Character→ ASCII ASC S, D Twelve characters of the characer
P95 code PASC constants of “S” are converted to
15
ASCII code and stored in “D” to
“D+5”.
F96 16-bit table data SRC S1, The data of “S1” is searched for in
P96 search PSRC S2, the areas in the range “S2” to “S3”
7
S3 and the result is stored in DT9037
and DT9038
F97 32-bit table data DSRC S1, The data of (S1+1, S1) is searched
P97 search PDSRC S2, for in the 32-bit data designated by
S3 “S3”, beginning from “S2”, and the 11
result if stored in DT90037 and
DT90038.
Data shift instructions
F98 Data table shift-out CMPR D1, Transfer “D2” to “D3”. Any parts of
P98 and compress PCMPR D2, the data between “D1” and “D2” that
7
D3 are 0 are compressed, and shifted in
order toward “D2”.
F99 Data table shift-in CMPW S, D1, Transfer “S” to “D1”. Any parts of the
P99 and compress PCMP D2 data between “D1” and “D2” that are
7
W 0 are compressed, and shifted in
order toward “D2”.
F100 Right shift of SHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the right.
P100 multiple bits (n bits) PSHR 5
in a 16-bit data
F101 Left shift of multiple SHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the left.
P101 bits (n bits) in a 16- PSHL 5
bit data
F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data
P102 in a 32-bit data PDSHR area specified by (D+1, D) to the 5
right.
F103 Left shift of n bits in DSHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data
5
P103 a 32-bit data PDSHL area specified by (D+1, D) to the left.
F105 Right shift of one BSR D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to
P105 hexadecimal digit (4- PBSR the right. 3
bit)
F106 Left shift of one BSL D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to
P106 hexade-cimal digit PBSL the left. 3
(4-bit)
F108 Right shift of BITR D1, Shifts the “n” bits of data range by
7
P108 multiple bits (n bits) PBITR D2, n “D1” and “D2” to the right.
F109 Left shift of multiple BITL D1, Shifts the “n” bits of data range by
7
P109 bits (n bits) PBITL D2, n “D1” and “D2” to the left.
F110 Right shift of one WSHR D1, Shifts the one word of the areas by
5
P110 word (16-bit) PWSHR D2 “D1” and “D2” to the right.
F111 Left shift of one WSHL D1, Shifts the one word of the areas by
5
P111 word (16-bit) PWSHL D2 “D1” and “D2” to the left.
F112 Right shift of one WBSR D1, Shifts the one digit of the areas by
P112 hexade-cimal digit PWBSR D2 “D1” and “D2” to the right. 5
(4-bit)
F113 Left shift of one WBSL D1, Shifts the one digit of the areas by
P113 hexade-cimal digit PWBSL D2 “D1” and “D2” to the left. 5
(4-bit)
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

15-53
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Boo- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand

FIFO instructions
F115 FIFO buffer define FIFT n, D The “n” words beginning from “D” are
5
P115 PFIFT defined in the buffer.
F116 Data read from FIFR S, D The oldest data beginning from “S”
P116 FIFO buffer PFIFR that was written to the buffer is read 5
and stored in “D”.
F117 Data write into FIFW S, D The data of “S” is written to the buffer
5
P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW starting from “D”.
Basic function instructions
F118 UP/DOWN counter UDC S, D Counts up or down from the value
preset in “S” and stores the elapsed 5
value in “D”.
F119 Left/right shift LRSR D1, Shifts one bit to the left or right with
register D2 the area between “D1” and “D2” as 5
the register.
Data rotate instructions
F120 16-bit data right ROR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in data of “D” to
5
P120 rotate PROR the right.
F121 16-bit data left ROL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in data of “D” to
5
P121 rotate PROL the left.
F122 16-bit data right RCR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 17-bit area
P122 rotate with carry PRCR consisting of “D” plus the carry flag 5
flag (R9009) data (R9009) data to the right.
F123 16-bit data left RCL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 17-bit area
P123 rotate with carry PRCL consisting of “D” plus the carry flag 5
flag (R9009) data (R9009) data to the left.
F125 32-bit data right DROR D, n Rotate the number of bits specified
P125 rotate PDROR by “n” of the double words data (32
5
bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the
right.
F126 32-bit data left DROL D, n Rotate the number of bits specified
P126 rotate PDROL by “n” of the double words data (32
5
bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the
left.
F127 32-bit data right DRCR D, n Rotate the number of bits specified
P127 rotate with carry PDRCR by “n” of the double words data (32
flag (R9009) data bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the 5
right together with carry flag
(R9009) data.
F128 32-bit data left DRCL D, n Rotate the number of bits specified
P128 rotate with carry PDRCL by “n” of the double words data (32
flag (R9009) data bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left 5
together with carry flag (R9009)
data.
Bit manipulation instructions
F130 16-bit data bit set BTS D, n Set the value of bit position “n” of
5
P130 PBTS the data of “D” to 1.
F131 16-bit data bit BTR D, n Set the value of bit position “n” of
5
P131 reset PBTR the data of “D” to 0.
F132 16-bit data invert BTI D, n Invert the value of bit position “n” of
5
P132 PBTI the data of “D”.
F133 16-bit data bit test BTT D, n Test the value of bit position “n” of
P133 PBTT the data of “D” and output the result 5
to R900B.
F135 Number of on (1) BCU S, D Store the number of on bits in the
5
P135 bits in 16-bit data PBCU data of “S” in “D”.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

15-54
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num Boo- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Description
-ber lean rand

F136 Number of DBCU S, D Store the number of on bits in the data of

P136 on (1) bits in PDBCU (S+1, S) in “D”. 7
32-bit data
Basic function instruction
F137 Auxiliary STMR S, D Turn on the specified output and R900D
5
timer (16-bit) after 0.01 s × set value.
Special instructions
F138 Hours, min- HMSS S, D Converts the hour, minute and second
P138 utes and sec- PHMSS data of (S+1, S) to seconds data, and
5
onds to the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). *1
seconds data
F139 Seconds to SHMS S, D Converts the seconds data of (S+1, S) to
P139 hours, PSHMS hour, minute and second data,
5
minutes and and the converted data is stored in (D+1, *1
seconds data D).
F140 Carry flag STC - Turns on the carry flag (R9009).
1
P140 (R9009) set PSTC
F141 Carry flag CLC - Turns off the carry flag (R9009).
1
P141 (R9009) reset PCLC
F142 Watching WDT S The time (allowable scan time for the
P142 dog timer PWDT system) of watching dog timer is 3
update changed to “S” × 0.1 (ms) for that scan.
F143 Partial I/O IORF D1, D2 Updates the I/O from the number
P143 update PIORF specified by “D1” to the number specified 5
by “D2”.
F144 Serial data TRNS S, n The COM port received flag (R9038) is
communica- set to off to enable reception.
5
tion control Beginning at “S”, “n” bytes of the data *4
registers are sent from the COM port.
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to another station in the
9
P145 PSEND D, N network (MEWNET). (via link unit)
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data to another station
9
P146 PRECV N, D in the network (MEWNET). (via link unit)
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station as
9
P145 D, N the MOD bus master. (via COM port) *2
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data from the slave station
9
P146 N, D as the MOD bus master. (via COM port) *2
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station of the
9
P145 D, N MOD bus master, type II. *3 *3
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data from the slave station
9
P146 N, D of the MOD bus master, type II. *3 *3
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station as
9
P145 D, N the MEWTOCOL master. (via COM port) *2 *2
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data from the slave station
P146 N, D as the MEWTOCOL master. (via COM 9
*2 *2
port)
F147 Printout PR S, D Converts the ASCII code data in the area
starting with “S” for printing, and outputs
5
it to the word external output relay WY
specified by “D”.
F148 Self- ERR n Stores the self-diagnostic error number
P148 diagnostic PERR (n: k100 “n” in (DT9000), turns R9000 on, and 3
error set to K299) turns on the ERROR LED.
F149 Message MSG S Displays the character constant of “S” in
13
P149 display PMSG the connected programming tool.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 type (V2.3 or later).
*2) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.20 or later and FPΣ 32k type.
*3) This instruction is available for FP-X V2.50 or later and FPΣ V3.20 or later.
*4) This instruction is available for FP0 V1.20 or later.

15-55
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand

F150 Data read from READ S1, S2, Reads the data from the
9
P150 intelli-gent unit PREAD n, D intelligent unit. *3
F151 Data write into WRT S1, S2, Writes the data into the intelligent
9
P151 intelli-gent unit PWRT n, D unit. *3
F152 Data read from RMRD S1, S2, Reads the data from the
P152 MEWNET-F PRMRD n, D intelligent unit at the MEWNET-F 9
slave station (remote I/O) slave station.
F153 Data write into RMWT S1, S2, Writes the data into the intelligent
P153 MEWNET-F PRMWT n, D unit at the MEWNET-F (remote 9
slave station I/O) slave station.
F155 Sampling SMPL - Starts sampling data.
1
P155 PSMPL *5 *4
F156 Sampling STRG - When the trigger of this
P156 trigger PSTRG instruction turns on, the sampling 1
*5 *4
trace stops.
F157 Time addition CADD S1, S2, The time after (S2+1, S2)
P157 PCADD D elapses from the time of (S1+2,
9
S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, *1
D).
F158 Time CSUB S1, S2, The time that results from
P158 substruction PCSUB D subtracting (S2+1, S2) from the
9
time (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored *1
in (D+2, D+1, D).
F159 Serial port MTRN S, n, D This is used to send data to an
P159 communication PMTRN external device through the
7
specified CPU COM port or MCU *2 *2
COM port.
F161 MCU serial port MRCV S, D1, Data is received from external
P161 reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of 7
*2 *2
the specified MCU.
BIN arithmetic instruction
F160 Double word DSQR S, D
P160 (32-bit) data PDSQR √(S)→(D) 7
square root
High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0, FP-e
F0 High-speed MV S, Performs high-speed counter and
counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according
Pulse output to the control code specified by 5
controls “S”. The control code is stored in
DT9052.
1 Change and DMV S, Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed
read of the DT9044 counter and Pulse output elapsed 7
elapsed value value area.
of high-speed DT9044, Transfers value in high-speed
counter and D counter and Pulse output elapsed 7
Pulse output value area to (D+1, D).
F166 High-speed HC1S n, S, Yn Turns output Yn on when the
counter output elapsed value of the built-in high-
set (with speed counter reaches the target 11
channel value of (S+1, S).
specification)
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 type (V2.3 or later).
*2) The instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later, and the pulse execution type can be specified.
FP10SH cannot be used.
*3) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 2.0 or later.
*4) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later.
*5) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.

15-56
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Boo-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Operand Description
ber lean

F167 High-speed HC1R n, S, Yn Turns output Yn off when the

counter output elapsed value of the built-in high-
reset (with speed counter reaches the target 11
channel value of (S+1, S).
specification)
F168 Positioning SPD1 S, n Outputs a positioning pulse from
control (with the specified output (Y0 or Y1)
5
channel according to the contents of the
specification) data table beginning at “S”.
F169 Pulse output (with PLS S, n Outputs a pulse from the
channel specified output (Y0 or Y1)
5
specification) according to the contents of the
data table beginning at “S”.
F170 PWM output (with PWM S, n Performs PWM output from the
channel specified outptu (Y0 or Y1)
5
specification) according to the contents of the
data table beginning at “S”.
High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0R
F0 High-speed MV S, Performs high-speed counter
counter and Pulse DT90052 and Pulse output controls
output controls according to
5
the control code specified by “S”.
The control code is stored in
DT90052.
F1 Change and read DMV S, Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed
of the elapsed DT90300 counter and Pulse output
7
value of high- elapsed value area (DT90045,
speed counter DT90044).
and Pulse output DT90300 Transfers value in high-speed
,D counter and Pulse output
7
elapsed value area (DT90045,
DT90044) to (D+1, D).
F165 Cam control CAM0 S Controls cam operation (on/off
patterns of each cam output)
3
according to the elapsed value of
the high-speed counter.
F166 Target value much HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the
on (with channel elapsed value of the high-speed
specification) counter or pulse output reaches
(High-speed the target value of (S+1, S). 11
counter
control/Pulse
output control)
F167 Target value much HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the
off (with channel elapsed value of the high-speed
specification) counter or pulse output reaches
(High-speed the target value of (S+1, S). 11
counter
control/Pulse
output control)
F171 Pulse output (JOG SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output
positioning type from the specified channel, in
5
0/1) (Trapezoidal accordance with the contents of
control) the data table that starts with S.
F172 Pulse output (JOG PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the
operation 0 and 1) specified output, in accordance
5
with the contents of the data
table that starts with S.
F173 PWM output (with PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the
channel specified output, in accordance
5
specification) with the contents of the data
table that starts with S.

15-57
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boo-lean Operand Description
ber

F174 Pulse output SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the

(Selectable data specified channel according to
5
table control the
operation ) data table specified by S.
F175 Pulse output SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Linear in accordance with the
interpolation) designated data table, so that 5
the path to the target position
forms a straight line.
F176 Pulse output SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Circular in accordance with the
interpolation) designated data table, so that 5
the path to the target position
forms an arc.
F177 Pulse output HOME S, n Performs the home return
(Home return) according to the specified data 7
table.
F178 Input pulse PLSM S1, S2, D Measures the number of pulses
measurement and cycle of pulses to be input
(No. of pulses, to the high-speed counter of the 5
cycle for input specified channel.
pulses)

15-58
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Boo-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Operand Description
ber lean

High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FPΣ/FP-X

F0 High-speed MV S, DT90052 Performs high-speed counter
counter and and Pulse output controls
Pulse output according to
5
controls the control code specified by “S”.
The control code is stored in
DT90052.
F1 Change and read DMV FPΣ: Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed
of the elapsed S, DT90044 counter and Pulse output
7
value of high- FP-X: elapsed value area (DT90045,
speed counter S, DT90300 DT90044).
and Pulse output FPΣ: Transfers value in high-speed
DT90044, D counter and Pulse output
7
FP-X: elapsed value area (DT90045,
DT90300, D DT90044) to (D+1, D).
F166 Target value HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the
much on (with elapsed value of the built-in
11
channel high-speed counter reaches the
specification) target value of (S+1, S).
F167 Target value HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the
much off (with elapsed value of the built-in
11
channel high-speed counter reaches the
specification) target value of (S+1, S).
F171 Pulse output SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output
(with channel from the specified channel, in
specification) accordance with the contents of
5
(Trapezoidal the data table that starts with S.
control and
home return)
F172 Pulse output PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the
(with channel specified output, in accordance
5
specification) with the contents of the data
(JOG operation) table that starts with S.
F173 PWM output PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the
(with channel specified output, in accordance
5
specification) with the contents of the data
table that starts with S.
F174 Pulse output SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the
(with channel specified channel according to
specification) the
5
(Selectable data data table specified by S.
table control
operation )
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels.

15-59
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Description
-ber rand

F175 Pulse output SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in

(Linear accordance with the designated
5
interpolation) data table, so that the path to the *3
target position forms a straight line.
F176 Pulse output SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in
(Circular accordance with the designated
5
interpolation) data table, so that the path to the *3
target position forms an arc.
Screen display instructions
F180 FP-e screen SCR S1, S2, Register the screen displayed on
display S3, S4 the FP-e. 9
registration
F181 FP-e screen DSP S Specify the screen to be displayed
display on the FP-e. 3
switching
Basic function instruction
F182 Time FILTR S1, S2, Executes the filter processing for
constant S3, D the specified input. 9
*5 *4
processing
F183 Auxiliary DSTM S, D Turn on the specified output and
timer (32-bit) R900D after 7
*7
0.01 s. × set value.
Data transfer instructions
F190 Three 16-bit MV3 S1, S2, (S1)→(D), (S2)→(D+1),
10
P190 data move PMV3 S3, D (S3)→(D+2)
F191 Three 32-bit DMV3 S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D), (S2+1,
P191 data move PDMV3 S3, D S2)→(D+3, D+2), (S3+1, 16
S3)→(D+5, D+4)
Logic operation instructions
F215 32-bit data DAND S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1,
7
P215 AND PDAND D S2)→(D+1,
D)
F216 32-bit data DOR S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) OR (S2+1, S2)→(D+1,
12
P216 OR PDOR D D)
F217 32-bit data DXOR S1, S2,
P217 XOR PDXOR D {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)} OR
12
{(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1,
S2)}→(D+1, D)
F218 32-bit data DXNR S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)} OR
P218 XNR PDXNR D {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, 12
S2)}→(D+1, D)
F219 Double word DUNI S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) AND (S3+1, S3)} OR
P219 (32-bit) data PDUNI S3, D {(S2+1, S2) AND (S3+1, 16
unites S3)}→(D+1, D)
Data conversion instructions
F230 Time data → TMSEC S, D The specified time data ( a date
P230 second PTMSEC and time) is changed to the second 6
*2 *6 *1 *1
conversion data.
F231 Second SECTM S, D The specified second data is
P231 data→ time PSECTM changed into time data (a date and 6
*2 *6 *1 *1
conversion time).
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.FP10SH cannot be used.
*2) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k type.
*3) This instruction is available for FPΣ C32T2, C28P2, C32T2H and C28P2H.
*4) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later. *5) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.
*6) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 1.13 or later.
*7) This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver. 3.10 or later.

15-60
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand

F235 16-bit binary GRY S, D Converts the 16-bit binary data of

P235 data → Gray PGRY “S” to gray codes, and the 6
code conversion converted result is stored in the “D”.
F236 32-bit binary DGRY S, D Converts the 32-bit binary data of
P236 data → Gray PDGRY (S+1, S) to gray code, and the
8
code conversion converted result is stored in the
(D+1, D).
F237 16-bit gray code GBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of “S” to
P237 → binary data PGBIN binary data, and the converted 6
conversion result is stored in the “D”.
F238 32-bit gray code DGBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of (S+1, S)
P238 → binary data PDGBIN to binary data, and the converted 8
conversion result is stored in the (D+1, D).
F240 Bit line to bit COLM S, n, The values of bits 0 to 15 of “S” are
P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit “n” of (D to DC+15). 8
conversion
F241 Bit column to bit LINE S, n, The values of bit “n” of (S) to (S+15)
8
P241 line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits 0 to 15 of “D”.
F250 Binary data → BTOA S1, Converts multiple binary data to
ASCII S2, n, multiple ASCII data. 12
*1
conversion D
F251 ASCII → binary ATOB S1, Converts multiple ASCII data to
data conversion S2, n, multiple binary data. 12
*1
D
F252 ASCII data ACHK S1, Checks the ASCII data strings to be
10
check S2, n used in F251 (ATOB) instruction. *3 *2
Character strings instructions
F257 Comparing SCMP S1, These instructions compare two
P257 character S2 specified character strings and
10
strings output the judgment results to a
special internal relay.
F258 Character string SADD S1, These instructions couple one
12
P258 coupling S2, D character string with another.
F259 Number of LEN S, D These instructions determine the
P259 characters in a number of characters in a character 6
character string string.
F260 Search for SSRC S1, The specified character is searched
10
P260 character string S2, D in a character string.
F261 Retrieving data RIGHT S1, These instructions retrieve a
P261 from character S2, D specified number of characters from
8
strings (right the right side of the character string.
side)
F262 Retrieving data LEFT S1, These instructions retrieve a
P262 from character S2, D specified number of characters from
8
strings (left the left side of the character string.
side)
F263 Retrieving a MIDR S1, These instructions retrieve a
P263 character string S2, character string consisting of a
from a character S3, D specified number of characters from 10
string the specified position in the
character string.
F264 Writing a MIDW S1, These instructions write a specified
P264 character string S2, D, number of characters from a
12
to a character n character string to a specified
string position in the character string.
F265 Replacing SREP S, D, A specified number of characters in
P265 character p, n a character string are rewritten,
12
strings starting from a specified position in
the character string.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k type.
*2) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later.
*3) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.

15-61
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand

Integer type data processing instructions

F270 Maximum MAX S1, Searches the maximum value in the
P270 value (word PMAX S2, D word data table between the “S1” and
data (16-bit)) “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The 8
*1
address relative to “S1” is stored in
“D+1”.
F271 Maximum DMAX S1, Searches for the maximum value in
P271 value (double PDMAX S2, D the double word data table between
word data (32- the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, 8
*1
bit)) and stores it in the “D”. The address
relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.
F272 Minimum value MIN S1, Searches for the minimum value in
P272 (word data (16- PMIN S2, D the word data table between the area
bit)) selected with “S1” and “S2”, and 8
*1
stores it in the “D”. The address
relative to “S1” is stored in “D+1”.
F273 Minimum value DMIN S1, Searches for the minimum value in
P273 (double word PDMIN S2, D the double word data table between
data (32-bit)) the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, 8
*1
and stores it in the “D”. The address
relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.
F275 Total and MEAN S1, The total value and the mean value of
P275 mean values PMEAN S2, D the word data with sign from the area
8
(word data (16- selected with “S1” to “S2” are *1
bit)) obtained and stored in the “D”.
F276 Total and DMEAN S1, The total value and the mean value of
P276 mean values PDMEAN S2, D the double word data with sign from
8
(double word the area selected with “S1” to “S2” *1
data (32-bit)) are obtained and stored in the “D”.
F277 Sort (word SORT S1, The word data with sign from the
P277 data (16-bit)) PSORT S2, area specified by “S1” to “S2” are
S3 sorted in ascending order (the 8
*1
smallest word is first) or descending
order (the largest word is first).
F278 Sort (double DSORT S1, The double word data with sign from
P278 word data (32- PDSORT S2, the area specified b “S1” ato “S2” are
bit)) S3 sorted in ascending order (the 8
*1
smallest word is first) or descending
order (the largest word is first).
F282 Scaling of SCAL S1, The toutptu value Y is found for the
P282 16-bit data PSCAL S2, D input value X by performing scaling 8
*1
for the given data table.
F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1, The toutptu value Y is found for the
P283 32-bit data PDSCAL S2, D input value X by performing scaling 10
for the given data table.
F284 Inclination RAMP S1, Executes the linear output for the
P284 output of 16-bit S2, specified time from the specified 10
*2 *2
data S3, D initial value to the target value.
Integer type non-linear function instructions
F285 Upper and LIMT S1, When S1>S3, S1→D
P285 lower limit PLIMT S2, When S1<S3, S2→D
10
control S3, D When S1<or = S3<or = S2, S3→D *1
(16-bit data)
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.2 or later.
*2) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.

15-62
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand

F286 Upper and DLIMT S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1,
P286 lower limit PDLIMT S3, D S1)→(D+1, D)
control When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1,
16
(32-bit data) S2)→(D+1, D) *1
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or
= (S2+1, S2), (S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)
F287 Deadband BAND S1, S2, When S1>S3, S3−S1→D
P287 control PBAND S3, D When S2<S3, S3−S2→D 10
*1
(16-bit data) When S1<or = S3<or = S2, 0→D
F288 Deadband DBAND S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S3+1,
P288 control PDBAND S3, D S3)−(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
(32-bit data) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S3+1,
16
S3)−(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) *1
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or
= (S2+1, S2),0→(D+1, D)
F289 Zone control ZONE S1, S2, When S3<0, S3+S1→D
P289 (16-bit data) PZONE S3, D When S3=0, 0→D 10
*1
When S3>0, S3+S2→D
F290 Zone control DZONE S1, S2, When (S3+1, S3)<0, (S3+1,
P290 (32-bit data) PDZONE S3, D S3)+(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3)=0, 0→(D+1, D) 16
*1
When (S3+1, S3)>0, (S3+1,
S3)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
BCD type real number operation instructions
F300 BCD type sine BSIN S, D SIN(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
6
P300 operation PBSIN
F301 BCD type BCOS S, D COS(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P301 cosine PBCOS 6
operation
F302 BCD type BTAN S, D TAN(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P302 tangent PBTAN 6
operation
F303 BCD type BASIN S, D SIN-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P303 arcsine PBASIN 6
operation
F304 BCD type BACOS S, D COS-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P304 arccosine PBACOS 6
operation
F305 BCD type BATAN S, D TAN-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P305 arctangent PBATAN 6
operation
Floating-point type real number operation instructions
F309 Floating-point FMV S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
8
P309 type data move PFMV *2 *2
F310 Floating-point F+ S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P310 type data PF+ D 14
*2 *2
addition
F311 Floating-point F- S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)−(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P311 type data PF- D 14
*2 *2
subtraction
F312 Floating-point F* S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)×(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P312 type data PF* D 14
*2 *2
multiplication
F313 Floating-point F% S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P313 type data PF% D 14
*2 *2
division
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.2 or later.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.21 or later, FP0 V2.1 or later.

15-63
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Boo- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand

F314 Floating-point type SIN S, D SIN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)

10
P314 data sine operation PSIN *1 *1
F315 Floating-point type COS S, D COS(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P315 data cosine PCOS 10
*1 *1
operation
F316 Floating-point type TAN S, D TAN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P316 data tangent PTAN 10
*1 *1
operation
-1
F317 Floating-point type ASIN S, D SIN (S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P317 data arcsine PASIN 10
*1 *1
operation
F318 Floating-point type ACOS S, D COS-1(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P318 data arccosine PACOS 10
*1 *1
operation
-1
F319 Floating-point type ATAN S, D TAN (S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P319 data arctangent PATAN 10
*1 *1
operation
F320 Floating-point type LN S, D LN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P320 data natural PLN 10
*1 *1
logarithm
F321 Floating-point type EXP S, D EXP(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P321 data exponent PEXP 10
*1 *1

F322 Floating-point type LOG S, D LOG(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)

10
P322 data logarithm PLOG *1 *1
F323 Floating-point type PWR S1, (S1+1, S1) ^ (S2+1, S2)→(D+1,
14
P323 data power PPWR S2, D D) *1 *1
F324 Floating-point type FSQR S, D
10
P324 data square root PFSQR √(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) *1 *1
F325 16-bit integer data to FLT S, D Converts the 16-bit integer data
P325 floating-point type PFLT with sign specified by “S” to real
6
data conversion number data, and the converted *1 *1
data is stored in “D”.
F326 32-bit integer data to DFLT S, D Converts the 32-bit integer data
P326 floating-point type PDFLT with sign specified by (S+1, S) to
data conversion real number data, and the 8
*1 *1
converted data is stored in (D+1,
D).
F327 Floating-point type INT S, D Converts real number data
P327 data to 16-bit integer PINT specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-
con-version (the bit integer data with sign (the
largest inte-ger not largest integer not exceeding the 8
*1 *1
ex-ceeding the floating-point data), and the
floating-point type converted data is stored in “D”.
data)
F328 Floating-point type DINT S, D Converts real number data
P328 data to 32-bit integer PDINT specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-
con-version (the bit integer data with sign (the
largest inte-ger not largest integer not exceeding the 8
*1 *1
ex-ceeding the floating-point data), and the
floating-point type converted data is stored in (D+1,
data) D).
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.21 or later, FP0 V2.1 or later.

15-64
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand

F329 Floating-point FIX S, D Converts real number data specified

P329 type data to 16-bit PFIX by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data
integer con- with sign (rounding the first decimal
version (rounding point down), and the converted data 8
*1 *1
the first decimal is stored
point down to in “D”.
integer)
F330 Floating-point DFIX S, D Converts real number data specified
P330 type data to 32-bit PDFIX by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data
integer con- with sign (rounding the first decimal
version (rounding point down), and the converted data 8
*1 *1
the first decimal is stored
point down to in (D+1, D).
integer)
F331 Floating-point ROFF S, D Converts real number data specified
P331 type data to 16-bit PROFF by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data
integer con- with sign (rounding the first decimal
version (rounding point off), and the converted data is 8
*1 *1
the first decimal stored in “D”.
point off to
integer)
F332 Floating-point DROFF S, D Converts real number data specified
P332 type data to 32-bit PDROFF by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data
integer con- with sign (rounding the first decimal
version (rounding point off), and the converted data is 8
*1 *1
the first decimal stored in (D+1, D).
point off to
integer)
F333 Floating-point FINT S, D The decimal part of the real number
P333 type data round- PFINT data specified in (S+1, S) is rounded
ding the first down, and the result is stored in 8
*1 *1
decimal point (D+1, D).
down
F334 Floating-point FRINT S, D
The decimal part of the real number
P334 type data round- PFRINT data stored in (S+1, S) is rounded
8
ding the first off, and the result is stored in (D+1, *1 *1
decimal point off D).
F335 Floating-point F+/- S, D The real number data stored in (S+1,
P335 type data sign PF+/- S) is changed the sign, and the 8
*1 *1
changes result is stored in (D+1, D).
F336 Floating-point FABS S, D Takes the absolute value of real
P336 type data absolute PFABS number data specified by (S+1, S),
8
and the result (absolute value) is *1 *1
stored in (D+1, D).
F337 Floating-point RAD S, D The data in degrees of an angle
P337 type data degree PRAD specified in (S+1, S) is converted to
8
→ radian radians (real number data), and the *1 *1
result is stored in (D+1, D).
F338 Floating-point DEG S, D The angle data in radians (real
P338 type data radian → PDEG number data) specified in (S+1, S) is
8
degree converted to angle data in degrees, *1 *1
and the result is stored in (D+1, D).
Floating-point type real number data processing instructions
F345 Floating-point FCMP S1, (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→ R900A: on
P345 type data compare PFCMP S2 (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→ R900B on 10
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on
F346 Floating-point FWIN S1, (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→ R900A: on
P346 type data band PFWIN S2, (S2+1, S2)<or =(S1+1, S1)<or
14
compare S3 =(S3+1, S3) → R900B on
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.21 or later, FP0 V2.1 or later.

15-65
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand

F347 Floating-point FLIMT S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3),

P347 type data PFLIMT S3, D (S1+1, S1) →(D+1, D)
upper and When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3),
lower limit (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 17
control When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1,
S3)<or =(S2+1, S2), (S3+1,
S3)→(D+1, D)
F348 Floating-point FBAND S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3),
P348 type data PFBAND S3, D (S3+1, S3)−(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
dead-band When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3),
17
control (S3+1, S3)−(S2+1, S2)→ (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1,
S3)<or =(S2+1, S2), 0.0→(D+1, D)
F349 Floating-point FZONE S1, S2, When (S3+1, S3)<0.0,
P349 type data PFZONE S3, D (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
zone control When (S3+1, S3)=0.0, 0.0→ (D+1,
17
D)
When (S3+1, S3)>0.0, (S3+1,
S3)+(S2+1, S2) →(D+1, D)
F350 Floating-point FMAX S1, S2, Searches the maximum value in the
P350 type data PFMAX D real number data table between the
maxi-mum area selected with “S1” and “S2”,
8
value and stores it in the (D+1, D). The
address relative to “S1” is stored in
(D+2).
F351 Floating-point FMIN S1, S2, Searches the minimum value in the
P351 type data PFMIN D real number data table between the
mini-mum area selected with “S1” and “S2”,
8
value and stores it in the (D+1, D). The
address relative to “S1” is stored in
(D+2).
F352 Floating-point FMEAN S1, S2, The total value and the mean value
P352 type data total PFMEAN D of the real number data from the
and mean area selected with “S1” to “S2” are
8
values obtained. The total value is stored in
the (D+1, D) and the mean value is
stored in the (D+3, D+2).
F353 Floating-point FSORT S1, S2, The real number data from the area
P353 type data sort PFSORT S3 speciified by “S1” to “S2” are stored
in ascending order (the smallest 8
word is first) or descending order
(the largest word is first).
F354 Scaling of FSCAL S1, S2, Scaling (linearization) on a real
P354 real number PFSCAL D number data table is performed, and
12
data the output (Y) to an input value (X) *2 *3 *1 *1
is calculated.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later. FP10SH cannot be used.
*2) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k type.
*3) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 1.13 or later.

15-66
 FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps

FP0R

FP-X
FP-e
Num- Ope-

FPΣ
FP0

FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand

Time series processing instruction

F355 PID processing PID S PID processing is performed
depending on the control value
(mode and parameter) specified
4
by (S to S+2) and (S+4 to S+10), *3
and the result is stored in the
(S+3).
F356 Eaay PID EZPID S1, Temperature control (PID) can be
S2, easily performed using the image 10
*2 *2
S3, S4 of a temperautre controller.
Compare instructions
F373 16-bit data DTR S, D If the data in the 16-bit area
P373 revision PDTR specified by “S” has changed
detection since the previous execution,
6
internal relay R9009 (carry flag)
will turn on. “D” is used to store
the data of the previous execution.
F374 32-bit data DDTR S, D If the data in the 32-bit area
P374 revision PDDTR specified by (S+1, S) has changed
detection since the previous execution,
internal relay R9009 (carry flag) 6
will turn on. (D+1, D) is used to
store the data of the previous
execution.
Index register bank processing instructions
F410 Setting the SETB n Index register (I0 to ID) bank
P410 index regis-ter PSETB number change over. 4
bank number
F411 Changing the CHGB n Index register (I0 to ID) bank
P411 index regis-ter PCHGB number change over with
4
bank number remembering preceding bank
number.
F412 Restoring the POPB - Changes index register (I0 to ID)
P412 index regis-ter PPOPB bank number back to the bank
2
bank number before F411 (CHGB)/P411
(PCHGB) instruction.
File register bank processing instructions
F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change
P414 register bank PSBFL over. 4
*1
number
F415 Changing the CBFL n File register bank number change
P415 file register PCBFL over with remembering preceding 4
*1
bank number bank number.
F416 Restoring the PBFL - Changes file register bank number
P416 file register PPBFL back to the bank before F415 2
*1
bank number (CBFL)/P415 (PCBFL) instruction.
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially
*1) This instruction is not available for FP10SH.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-X V.1.20 or later, and FPΣ 32k type.
*3) This instruction is available for FP0 V2.1 or later.

15-67
15.4 Table of Error codes
„ Difference in ERROR display
There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model.
Model Display Display method
FP1,FP-M,FP2,FP3,FP10SH LED ERROR. Continually lit
FPΣ,FP0, FP0R, FP-X LED ERROR/ALARM Flashes/contunually lit
FP-e Screen display ERR. Continually lit

„ Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON

When the “ERROR” on the control unit (CPU unit) turns on or flashes, a self-diagnostic error or syntax
check error has occurred. Confirm the contents of the error and take the appopriate steps.

-Error Confirmation Method

Procedure:1.Use the programming tool software to call up the error code.
By executing the “STATUS DISPLAY”, the error code and content of error are
displayed.
2.Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code
ascertained above.

-Syntax check error

This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting
written in the program. When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode, the total check function
automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the
program.

When a syntax check error is detected

-ERROR turns on or flashes.
-Operation will not begin even after swirching to the RUN mode.
-Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode.

Clearing a syntax check error

By changing to the PROG.mode, the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off.

Steps to take for syntax error

Change to the PROG. mode, and then execute the total check function while online mode with the
programming tool connected. This will call up the content of error and the address where the error
occurred.
Correct the program while referring to the content of error.

15-68
-Self-diagnostic Error
This error occurs when the control unit (CPU unit) self-diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an
abnormality in the system. The self-diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection, I/O
abnomal detection, and other devices.

When a self-diagnostic error occurs

- The ERROR turns on or flashes.
- The operation of the control unit (CPU unit) might stop depending on the contect of error and the
system
register setting.
- The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000(DT90000).
- In the case of operation error, the error address will stored in the DT9017(DT90017) and
DT9018(DT90018).

Clearing the self-diagnostic error

At the “STATUS DISPLAY”, execute the “error clear”. Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared.
-You can use the initialize/test switch to clear an error. However, this will also clear the contents of
operation memory.
-Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG.mode.
However, the contents of operation memory, not stored with the hold type data, will also be cleared.
-The error can also be cleared depending on the self-diagnostic error set instruction F148(ERR).

Steps to take for self-diagnostic error

The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents. For more details, use the error code
obtained above and consult the table of aself-diagnostic error codes.

„ MEWTOCOL-COM Transmission Errors

These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response
when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL-COM.

15-69
„ Table of Syntax Check Error
Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

A program with a syntax error has been

Syntax written.
E1 Stops A A A A A A A A
error ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and correct the
error.
Two or more OT(Out) instructions and
KP(Keep) instructions are programmed using
the same relay.Also occurs when using the
same timer/counter number.
⇒ Change to PROG. mode and correct the
Duplicated
E2 program so that one relay
(Note) output Stops A A A A A A A A
is not used for two or more OT
error instructions,Or, set the duplicated output to
“enable” in system register20. A timer/counter
instructon double definition error will be
detected even if double output permission has
been selected.
For instructions which must be used in a pair
such as jump (JP and LBL), one instruction is
Not paired either missing or in an incorrect position.
E3 Stops A A A A A A A A
error ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and enter the two
instructions which must
be used in a pair in the correct positions.
An instruction has been written which does
not agree with system register settings. For
example, the number setting in a program
Parameter
does not agree with the timer/counter range
E4 mismatch Stops A A A A A A A A
setting.
error ⇒ Change to PROG. mode, check the
system register settings, and change so that
the settings and the instruction agree.
An instruction which must be written in a
specific area (main program area or
subprogram area) has been written to a
E5 Program
(Note) Stops different area (for example, a subroutine SUB A A A A A A A A
area error to RET is placed before an ED instruction).
⇒ Change to PROG. mode and enter the
instruction into the correct area.
A:Available
Note) This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN.
In this case, nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue.

15-70
 Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

The program is too large to compile in the

program memory.
⇒ Change to PROG. mode and reduce the
Compile
total number of steps for the program.
E6 memory Stops A A A A A A A
-FP10SH
full error If memory expansion is possible,compilation
will become possible when the memory is
expanded.
In the program, high-level instructions, which
execute in every scan and at the leading edge
of the trigger, are programmed to be triggered
High-level by one contact. (e.g. F0 (MV) and P0 (PMV)
E7 instruction Stops are programmed using the same trigger A A A A A A
type error continuously.)
⇒ Correct the program so that the high-level
instructions executed in every scan and only
at the leading edge are triggered separately.
High-level There is an incorrect operand in an instruction
instruction which requires a specific combination
E8 operand Stops operands (for example, the operands must all A A A A A A A A
combina- be of a certain type).
tion error ⇒ Enter the correct combination of operands.
No
Program may be damaged.
E9 program Stops A A
⇒Try to send the program again.
error
When inputting with the programming tool
Rewrite software,a delection,addition or change of
during order of an
Conti-
E10 RUN instruction(ED,LBL,SUB,RET,INT,IRET,SSTP A A A
nues ,and STPE) that cannot perform a rewrite
syntax
error during RUN is being attempted. Nothing is
written to the CPU.
A:Available

15-71
„ Table of Self-Diagnostic Error
Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

Probably a hardware abnormality

E20 CPU error Stops A A A
⇒Please contact your dealer.
RAM
E21
error1
RAM
E22
error2
RAM Stops
Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM.
E23 A A A
error3 ⇒Please contact your dealer.
RAM
E24
error4
RAM
E25
error5
Master
memory The models of master memories are different. A
*1
E25 model Stops Use the master memories created with the
)
unmatch same model.
error
FP-e,FP0,FP0R,FPΣ,and FP1
C14,C16:Probably a hardware abnormality.
⇒ Please contact your dealer.
FP-X:
When the master memory cassette is
mounted, the master memor cassette may be
damaged. Remove the master memory, and
check whether the ERROR turns off.
When the ERROR turned off, rewrite the
master memory as its contents are damaged,
and use it again.
When the ERROR does not turn off, please
User’s contact your dealer.
E26 Stops A A A A A A A A
ROM error FP1 C24,C40,C56,C72,and FP-M:
Probably an abnormality in the memory unit
⇒Program the memory unit again and try to
operate. If the same error is detected, try to
operate with another memory unit.
FP2,FP2SH,FP10SH,and FP3:
There may be a problem with the installed
ROM.
-ROM is not installed.
-ROM contens are damaged.
-Program size stored on the ROM is larger
than the capacity of the ROM
⇒Check the contents of the ROM
Units installed exceed the limitations.(i.e.,4 or
Unit
more link units)
E27 installation Stops A A A A A A
⇒ Turn off the power and re-configure units
error
referring to the hardware manual.
Probably an abnormality in the system
System
register.
E28 register Stops A
⇒ Check the system register setting or
error
initialize the system registers.
*1) This error occurs on FP-X Ver2.0 or later. A:Available

15-72
 Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

Configu-
A parameter error was detected in the
ration
E29 Stops MEWNET-W2 configuration area. Set a A A
parameter correct parameter.
error
Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality.
E30 Stops ⇒ Please contact your dealer.
error 0
An interrupt occurred without an interrupt
request . A hardware problem or error due to
Interrupt
E31 Stops noise is possible. A A A A A A A A
error 1 ⇒ Turn off the power and check the noise
conditions.
There is no interrupt program for an interrupt
which occurred.
Interrupt
E32 Stops ⇒ Check the number of the interrupt program A A A A A A A A
error 2 and change it to agree with the interrrupt
request..
Multi-CPU
This error occurs when a FP3/FP10SH is
data CPU2
E33 used as CPU2 for a multi-CPU system. A A
unmatch Stops ⇒Refer to “Multi-CPU system Manual”.
error
An abnormal unit is installed.
-FPΣ, FP0R(FP0R mode),FP-X, FP2,FP2SH
and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data register
DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit.Then
I/O status turn off the power and replace the unit with a
E34 Stops new one.
A A A A A
error
-FP3:
Check the contents of special data register
DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit. Then
turn off the power and replace the unit with a
new one.
MEWNET-F A unit, which cannot be installed on the slave
station of the MEWNET-F link system,is
slave
E35 Stops installed on the slave station. A A A
illegal unit ⇒Remove the illegal unit from the slave
error station.
MEWNET-F The number of slots or I/O points used for
(remore MEWNET-F(remote I/O) system exceeds the
limitation.
E36 I/O) Stops ⇒Re-configure the system so that the
A A A
limitation number of slots and I/O points is within the
error specified range.
MEWNET-F I/O overlap or I/O setting that is over the
I/O range is detected in the allocated I/O and
E37 Stops MEWNET-F I/O map.
A A A
mapping
error ⇒Re-configure the I/O map correctly

A:Available

15-73
 Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

I/O mapping for remote I/O terminal

MEWNET-F
boards,remote I/O terminal units and I/O link
slave I/O
is not correct.
E38 terminal Stops A A A
⇒Re-configure the I/O map for slave stations
mapping
according to the I/O points of the slave
error
stations.
When reading in the program from the IC
memory card(due to automatic reading
because of the dip switch setting or program
switching due to F14(PGRD) instruction):
- IC memory card is not installed.
- There is no program file or it is damaged.
IC card - Writing is disabled.
E39 Stops A A
read error - There is an abnormality in the
AUTOEXEC.SPG file.
- Program size stored on the card is larger
than the capacity of the CPU.
⇒Install an IC memory card that has the
program proterly recorded and execute the
read once again.
Abnormal I/O unit.
FPΣ, FP-X:
Check the contents of special data register
DT90002 and abnormal FPΣ expansion unit
(application cassette for FP-X). Then check
the unit.
FP2 and FP2SH:
Check the contents of special data registers
DT90002,DT90003 and abnormal I/O
unit.Then check the unit.
Selection of operation status using system
register21:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Sele- Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro
E40 I/O error A A A A A
ctable at”I/O error” in the status display function.
MEWNET-TR communication error
FP3 and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data
registers(FP3:DT9002,DT9003,FP10SH:DT9
0002,DT90003) and the erroneous master
unit and abnormal I/O unit. Then check the
unit.
Selection of operation status using system
register21:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro
at”I/O error” in the status display function.
A:Available

15-74
 Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

An abnormality in an intelligent unit.

FPΣ, FP-X:
Check the contetns of special data register
“DT90006” and locate the abnormal FP
intelligent unit (application cassette for FP-X).
FP2,FP2SH,and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data registers
DT90006,DT90007 and locate the abnormal
intelligent unit.Then check the unit referring to
its manual..
Selection of operation status using system
register22:
Intelligent Selec-
E41 -to continue operation,set 1 A A A A A
unit error table -to stop operation,set 0
FP3:
Check the contents of special data registers
DT9006,DT9007 and locate the abnormal
intelligent unit.Then check the unit referring to
its manual..
Selection of operation status using system
register22:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro
at”I/O error” in the status display function.
I/O unit(Expansion unit) wiring condition has
changed compared to that at time fo power-
up.
⇒ Check the contents of special data register
(FP0: DT9010,
FPΣ, FP-X: DT90010,DT90011) and locate
the erroneous expansion unit.
It checks whether an expansion connector is
in agreement.
I/O unit Selec-
E42 ⇒ Check the contents of special data register A A A A A A A
verify error table (FP2,FP2SH,and
FP10SH:DT90010,DT90011,FP3
DT9010,DT9011)
Selection of operation status using system
register23:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro
at”I/O error” in the status display function.
A:Available

15-75
 Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ

FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

Scan time required for program execution

exceeds the setting of the system watching
dog timer.
System ⇒ Check the program and modify it so that
watching Selec- the program can execute a scan within the
E43 specified time.
A A
dog timer table
error Selection of operation status using system
register24:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Slave
staiton The time required for slave station connection
connecting exceeds the setting of the system register 35.
Selec- Selection of operation status using system
E44 time error register25:
A A A
table
for -to continue operation,set 1
MEWNET-F -to stop operation,set 0
system
Operation became impossible when a high-
level instruction was executed.
Selection of operation status using system
register26:
-to continue operation,set K1
-to stop operation,set K0
The address of operation error can be
confirmed in either special data registers
Operation Selec- DT9017 and DT9018, or DT90017 and
E45 DT90018. (It varies according to the model to
A A A A A A A A
error table
be used.)
DT9017, DT9018: FP-e, FP0,
FP0R(FP0 mode)
DT90017, DT90018: FP∑, FP-X,
FP0R(FP0R mode),
FP2, FP2SH, FP10SH
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro
at”I/O error” in the status display function.
A:Available

15-76
 Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

S-LINK error Occurs only in FP0-SL1

When one of the S-LINK errors (ERR1, 3 or
4) has been deteced,error code E46 (remote
Selec- I/O (S-LINK) communication error) is stored.
A
table Selection of operation status using system
register27:
-to continue operation,set K1
-to stop operation,set K0
MEWNET-F communication error
Remote A communication abnormally was caused by
a transmission cable or during the power-
I/O down of a slave station.
E46 commu- FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH:
nication Check the contents of special data registers
DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the
error abnormal slave station and recover the
Selec- communication condition.
FP3: A A A
table
Check the contents of special data registers
DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal
slave station and recover the communication
condition.
Selection of operation status using system
register27:
-to continue operation,set K1
-to stop operation,set K0
In the unit on the slave station, an
abnormallty such as:
-missing unit
-abnormal intelligent unit was detected.
FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data registers
MEW- DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the
abnormal slave station and recover the slave
NET-F Selec-
E47 condition. A A A
attribute table FP3:
error Check the contents of special data registers
DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal
slave station and recover the slave condition.
Selection of operation status using system
register28:
-to continue operation,set 1
-to stop operation,set 0
Expansion The power supply for the expansion unit was
unit power turned on after the control unit.
E49 supply Stops Turn on the power supply for the expansion A
sequence unit at the same time or before the control
unit is turend on.
error
The voltage of the backup battery lowered or
the backup battery of conrol unit is not
Backup installed.
Conti-
E50 battery ⇒ Check the installation of the backup A A A A A
nues battery and then replace battery if necessary.
errror
By setting the system register 4, you can
disregard this self-diagnostic error.

15-77
 Opera-
Error

FP10SH
Name

FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take

FP0R
code

FPΣ

FP-X
FP-e
FP0

FP2
status

MEWNET-F Terminal station setting was not properly

performed.
terminal Conti-
E51 Check stations at both ends of the A A A
station nues communication path,and set them in the
error terminal station using the dip switches.
MEWNET-F Set the INITIALIZE/TEST
selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the
I/O update Conti-
E52 INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode A A A
synchro- nues selector in the RUN position.If the same error
nous error occurs after this,please contact your dealer.
Multi-CPU
I/O regis-
Abnormality was detected when the multi-
tration Conti-
E53 CPU system ws used. A
error nues Please contact your dealer.
(CPU2
only)
The voltage of the backup battery for the IC
IC memory memory card lowered. The BATT.LED does
card back- Conti- not turn on.
E54 Charge or replace the backup battry of IC
A A
up battery nues
error memory card.(The contents of the IC
memory card cannot be guaranteed.)
The voltage of the backup battery for IC
IC memory memory card lowers.The BATT.LED does
not turn on.
card back- Cont-
E55 Charge or replace the backup battery of IC A A
up battery inues memory card.
error (The contents of the IC memory card cannot
be guaranteed.)
Incompat- The IC memory card installed is not
ible IC Cont- compatible.
E56 Replace the IC memory card compatible
A A
memory inues
card error with FP2SH/FP10SH.
MEWNET-W2/MCU
No unit for The MEWNET-W2 link unit or
MCU(Multi communication unit) is not
the Conti-
E57 installed in the slot specified using the A A
configu- nues configuration data.
ration Either install a unit in the specified slot or
change the parameter.
E100 Self- The error specified by the F148
to diagnostic Stop (ERR)/P148(PERR) instruction is occurred. A A A A A A
⇒ Take steps to clear the error condition
E199 error set according to the specification you chose.
by F148
E200
(ERR)/P148 Conti-
to A A A A A A
(PERR) nues
E299
instruction
A:Available

15-78
„ Table of MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Error

Error
Name Description
code

!21 NACK error Link system error

!22 WACK error Link system error
!23 Unit No. overlap Link system error
Transmission format
!24 Link system error
error
Link unit hardware
!25 Link system error
error
!26 Unit No. setting error Link system error
!27 No support error Link system error
!28 No response error Link system error
!29 Buffer closed error Link system error
!30 Time-out error Link system error
Transmission
!32 Link system error
impossible error
!33 Communication stop Link system error
!36 No destination error Link system error
Other communication
!38 Link system error
error
!40 BCC error A transfer error occurred in the received data.
!41 Format error A command was received that does not fit the format.
!42 No support error A command was received that is not supported.
Multiple frames A different command was received when processing multiple
!43
procedure error frames.
A route number that does not exist was spacified. Verify the
!50 Link setting error
route number by designating the transmission station.
Transmission Transmission to anather device not possible because
!51
time-out error transmissition buffer is congested.
Transmit disable Transmission processing to another device is not possible.(Link
!52
error unit runaway,etc.)
Command process cannot be received because of multiple
!53 Busy error frame processing.Or,cannot be received because command
being processed is congested.
!60 Parameter error Content of spacified parameter does not exist or cannot be used.
There was a mistake in the contact,data area,data number
!61 Data error
desigination,size designation,range,or format designation.
Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded
!62
error or when there was no registration.
PC command that cannot be processed was executed during
!63 PC mode error
RUN mode.

15-79
 Error
Name Description
code

An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM/IC memory

card.There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card.
-When loading,the specified contents exceeded the capacity.
External memory
!64 -Write error occurs.
error
-ROM or IC memory card is not installed.
-ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications
-ROM or IC memory card board is not installed.
A program or system register write operation was executed when
!65 Protect error theb protect mode (password setting or DIP switch,etc.)or ROM
operation mode was being used.
There was an error in the code format of the address data.
!66 Address error Alsi.when exceeded or insufficient of address data,there was a
mistake in the range designation.
Cannot be read because there is no program in the program
No program error
!67 area or the memory contains an error.Or,reading was attempted
and No data error
of data that was not registered.
When inputting with programming tool software,editing of an
Rewrite during RUN instruction (ED,SUB,RET,INT,IRET,SSTP,and STPE) that
!68
error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted.
Nothing is written to the CPU.
!70 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process.
Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same
!71
control error time as a command being processed.

15-80
15.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands
Table of MEWTOCOL-COM commands
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contact.
(RCS) - Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on and off.
(WCS) - Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter.
Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value.
Read timer/counter ellapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.
Monitors a registered contact or data using the
Monitoring start MG
code “MC or MD”.
Embeds the areaof a specified range in a 16-
Preset contact area (fill command) SC
point on and off pattern.
Writes the same contents to the data area of a
Preset data area (fill command) SD
specified range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable
Read the status of PLC RT
controller and error codes if an error occurs.
Switches the operation mode of the
Remote control RM
programmable controller.
Abort AB Aborts communication.

15-81
15.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD
BCD data
Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data
(Binary Coded Decimal)
0 0000 00000000 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 0001 00000000 00000001 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 0002 00000000 00000010 0000 0000 0000 0010
3 0003 00000000 00000011 0000 0000 0000 0011
4 0004 00000000 00000100 0000 0000 0000 0100
5 0005 00000000 00000101 0000 0000 0000 0101
6 0006 00000000 00000110 0000 0000 0000 0110
7 0007 00000000 00000111 0000 0000 0000 0111
8 0008 00000000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000
9 0009 00000000 00001001 0000 0000 0000 1001
10 000A 00000000 00001010 0000 0000 0001 0000
11 000B 00000000 00001011 0000 0000 0001 0001
12 000C 00000000 00001100 0000 0000 0001 0010
13 000D 00000000 00001101 0000 0000 0001 0011
14 000E 00000000 00001110 0000 0000 0001 0100
15 000F 00000000 00001111 0000 0000 0001 0101
16 0010 00000000 00010000 0000 0000 0001 0110
17 0011 00000000 00010001 0000 0000 0001 0111
18 0012 00000000 00010010 0000 0000 0001 1000
19 0013 00000000 00010011 0000 0000 0001 1001
20 0014 00000000 00010100 0000 0000 0010 0000
21 0015 00000000 00010101 0000 0000 0010 0001
22 0016 00000000 00010110 0000 0000 0010 0010
23 0017 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0010 0011
24 0018 00000000 00011000 0000 0000 0010 0100
25 0019 00000000 00011001 0000 0000 0010 0101
26 001A 00000000 00011010 0000 0000 0010 0110
27 001B 00000000 00011011 0000 0000 0010 0111
28 001C 00000000 00011100 0000 0000 0010 1000
29 001D 00000000 00011101 0000 0000 0010 1001
30 001E 00000000 00011110 0000 0000 0011 0000
31 001F 00000000 00011111 0000 0000 0011 0001
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
63 003F 00000000 00111111 0000 0000 0110 0011
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
255 00FF 00000000 11111111 0000 0010 0101 0101
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
9999 270F 00100111 00001111 1001 1001 1001 1001

15-82
15.7 ASCII Codes

15-83
15-84
Record of changes
Manual No. Date Desceiption of changes

ARCT1F475E May.2009 First Edition

 475E 200905
475E